Home

1 - Jeep

1. 299 INDEX vara a RUE E A A E REA ea e RR CR NU 311 INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it repre sents precision workmanship distinctive styl ing and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This is a specialized utility vehicle it can go places and perform tasks for which conven tional two wheel drive vehicles were not in tended It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger cars both on road and off road so take time to become familiar with your vehicle Before you start to drive this vehicle read the Owner s Manual and all the Supplements Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls particularly those used for braking steering and transmission and transfer case shifting Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience but as in driving any vehicle take it easy as you begin When driving off road or working the vehicle don t overload it or expect it to overcome the forces of nature Always observe local laws wherever you drive 4 As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Be sure to read the On Road Off Road Driving Tips in Starting And Operating for further information NOTE After you r
2. When releasing the sail panel retainers it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow 12 Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft top Ln 13 The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed unless the hard top is being installed To remove the swing gate brackets pull the front of the bracket forward while rolling the entire bracket back in toward the vehicle to disengage 14 Grasp the front side bow behind the header and lift the top y A 036007403 127 15 Fold back the front section of the top pulling the fabric rearward Gently rest the header on top of the rear portion of the deck 16 Fold the top so that the material forms a W as shown Enter the vehicle and move the material into two folds 128 17 Release the side bows by pressing down on the latch above the front of the rear door Push the top rearward to disengage Repeat this step on the other side im 18 Before lowering the top open the swing gate to prevent possible damage to the rear center high mounted brake light Grasp the folded side bows and slide the top along the door frame track to the rear door frame 81926dc3 19 Gently slide the side bows off the door frame track and lower the top down into the vehicle NOTE Help from another person will ease this operation pe 20 Tuck the fabric and the check straps be tween the bows as far inside as po
3. 217 e Tire Pressure 272222222222 217 e Tire Inflation Pressures 217 178 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 218 e Radial Ply Tires 22222222222 222 222 218 estire Spinning nose ys 219 219 exLife OfsTire 219 e Replacement Tires 219 e TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS 220 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS 221 e Base System 252 2520 e Es cu USE 222 e FUEL REQUIREMENTS GASOLINE ENGINES 224 Methanol aras EOS 224 O AMEN anta ps da amen ee aos 224 s Clean Ain Gasoline 225 MMT in Gasoline 22222252222 225 Materials Added to Fuel 225 FUEL REQUIREMENTS DIESEL ENGINES 226 FAN UE 222222 226 Locking Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 226 sSTRAICERWOWINGO TTE 227 e Common Towing Definitions 227 Breakaway Cable Attachment 228 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight E PTT 230 e Trailer And Tongue Weight 230 e Towing Requirements 230 s Towing TIDS oc eeen srana OO IR E 232 e Trailer Hitch Attaching Points 233 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC 234 Towing This Vehicle Behind Ano
4. 242 Preparations for Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located in the right rear of the engine compartment behind the Power Distribution Center Positive Battery Post WARNING Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Continued WARNING Continued e Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic ransmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unneces sary electrical accessories 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result WARNING Jump Starting Procedure WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage t
5. 246 e Four Wheel Drive Models 246 237 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assis tance the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position 238 NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped shift transmis sion into NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could dam age your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads HOT H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer rem
6. 15 exo Arm The System 15 To Disarmaihe System 22222222222 16 10 e ILEUMINATED ENTRY aaa a a e REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate e To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock Programming Additional Transmitters e General Information Transmitter Battery Replacement DOORS ese e sees sr eu E EE Upper Half Door Window Removal If Equipped Upper Half Door Window Installation If Equipped eskron iDoogHemovall PTT Rear Door Removal Four Door Models DOOR LOCKS cu re o Manual Door Locks 2 7 e Power Door Locks If Equipped e Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit lt Automatic Door Locks TTE e Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors AWINDOWS TET A e Power Windows If Equipped Wind Buffeting e REAR SWING GATE 24 e OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS 24 Lap Shoulder Belts 25 e Rear Center Lap Shoulder Belt Retractor Lockout Four Door Models 28 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 28 e Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 28 Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positi
7. OWNER REGISTRATION CERTIFICATE Selling Dealer OWNER Stamp ADDRESS Selling Dealer Signature eL Li LE Litt tt EE Private Make Business LLL Model have provided and explained the following OPERATING MANUAL Day Month Year Vehicle Handbook 41 VEHICLE DATE OF REG PRE DELIVERY INSPECTION Registration No CUSTOMER or License No SIGNATURE DEALER SIGNATURE 80140608 TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 0 e o es o fF INTRODUCTION RII RIA ms uL A RA IE HR ACA RR Te 3 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 9 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 51 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141 STARTING AND OPERATING 175 WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES 237 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 44 4 44 4 mox CR OA e 247 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 4 4 4 6 hon mon mona a aca ea RR RR 277 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
8. 162 Compass 162 Computer Trip Travel 154 160 CONSOIG x a ack Se S 93 Console 93 Cooling System 257 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 259 Coolant Capacity 273 Coolant Level 260 Disposal of Used Coolant 259 Drain Flush and Refill 258 INSPECTION oe due ote A 258 Points to Remember 260 Pressure Cap 259 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 258 273 Corrosion Protection 264 Cruise Light 149 Cupholders 93 Customer Assistance 302 Data Recorder Event 38 Defroster Rear Window 140 Defroster Windshield 49 166 167 171 Delay Intermittent Wipers 88 Diagnostic System Onboard 251 Diesel Engine Maintenance 290 Diesel Fuel snae er Rm Rh 226 Diesel Fuel Requirements 226 Dimmer Switch Headlight 85 Dipsticks Oil Engine 252 Power Steering 206 Disabled Vehicle Towing 245 Disarming Theft System 16 Disposal Engine Oll socias 254 Used Coolant Antifreeze 259 Door LoGkKS uias ee 20 DOORS 2 a Sene Me ibn ue 2 ee 18 Drivers Seat Back 78 DRIVING ete cm eee 2 198 Of Pavement
9. CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these intermittently and with greater caution Continued CAUTION Continued After the use of high power draw accesso ries or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of acces Sory or accessory bracket from the plug CUPHOLDERS Front Cupholders The front cupholders are located in the center console STORAGE Console Storage Compartment To lock or unlock the storage compartment insert the ignition key and turn To open the storage compartment press the latch and lift the cover Front Cupholders Rear Cupholders The rear cupholders are located on the back of the center console Center Console Rear Cupholders 93 Rear Storage Compartment The rear cargo area storage compartment cover is held by a spring loaded latch I
10. Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 283 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Q Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t Rotate tires Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary 67 500 Miles 108 000 km or 75 000 Miles 120 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tt 1 Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 1 Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing 1 Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 105 000 miles 168 000 km Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 82 500 Miles 132 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter T Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 284 90 000 Miles 144 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a a a
11. wheel move the steering column up or down as desired Pull upwards on the lever to lock the column firmly in place Tilt Steering Column Lever WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driv ing Adjusting the steering column while driv ing or driving with the steering column un locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death 89 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control buttons are lo cated on the right side of the steering wheel 1 ON OFF 2 RES 4 CANCEL 3 SET NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same 90 time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by push ing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use
12. ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle accel eration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades re fer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintain 47 ing Your Vehicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of opera tion This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indi cation of difficulty Additional Requirements For Diesel Engine If Equipped During the first 1500 km avoid heavy loads e g driving at full throttle Do not exceed 2 3 of the maximum permissible engine speed for each gear Change gear in good time Do not shift down a gear manually in order to brake SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER
13. X ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and or this size class Installing The ISOFIX Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were pro vided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages e are round bars located at the rear S of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces ISOFIX Anchorages Two Door Models ISOFIX Anchorages Four Door Models In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat Tether Strap Mounting Four Door Models Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means for adjusting the tension of the strap Forward facing toddler restraints some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap having a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means for adjusting the tension
14. 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tt 1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 150 000 Miles 240 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule LJ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tF Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 2 Inspect the transfer case fluid O O C O Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 289 T This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required o maintain emissions warranty WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competen
15. 148 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 168 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 149 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 42 Theft System Disarming 16 Tilt Steering Column 89 TOSA ped eR Rx 180 182 50 217 Air Pressure 217 Changing i xax pae ovx 239 General Information 217 High Speed 218 Inflation Pressures 217 JACKING 239 240 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 221 Pressure Warning Light 150 Radial mesam da RA m dem Es 218 Replacement 219 ROION ch du Feo dog ed onum aed 220 Spare Tire 239 tia Yi Gh cto he 219 Tread Wear Indicators 219 i es a ge hah 4 4 83 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 230 Torque Converter Clutch 191 193 TOWING 9555 Rs de ee 227 245 Disabled Vehicle 245 GUIDE 2 22 uere Hae 230 Recreational gt a 4 234 Eno 230 Towing EYES 45055 m 244 Trac Lok Rear Axle 196 Traction Control 209 Traction Control Light 153 Trailer Sway Control TSC 215 Towing 227 Cooling System Tips 233 uo cese ds de ede de sd 233 inimum Requirements 230 Trailer and Tongue Weight 230 Towing Guid
16. 148 207 Auto Down Power Windows 23 Brake System 260 A Adding Fuel sses sdn 440 226 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 160 Anti Lock ABS 207 Additives Fuel 225 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 168 Master Cylinder 261 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Automatic Transaxle Parking cus wa Ae 206 Cleaner Filter 254 Interlock System 14 Warning Light 147 Air Conditioner Maintenance 255 Automatic Transmission 191 262 Brake Transmission Interlock 188 Air Conditioning 165 Fluid and Filter Changes 262 Break In Recommendations New Air Conditioning Controls 165 Fluid Level 262 More os wa oe eae Bg a Os 47 Air Conditioning Filler 173 Fluid TYPE us n9 262 Bulb Replacement 272 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 174 Gear Ranges 188 Bulbs 2 iaa eee 50 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 255 SAMA s ewe ee eee dee ee 188 Air Conditioning System 165 168 Special Additives 262 Calibration Compass 162 ARO e P 254 Torque Converter 191 193 Capacities 273 Air Pressure Tires 217 AUOSIICK eG ey Be 192 Caps Filler Rer RR RYE S 31 Electrical Outl
17. 40 C the display will show 40 F 40 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC features a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster 040933866 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 158 This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by press ing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following System Status e Vehicle information warning message dis plays e Tire Pressure Monitor System if equipped Stop Start System Status if equipped e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Compass display Outside temperature display e Trip computer functions e Uconnect gps equipped Audio mode display system screens if The system allows the driver to select informa tion by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel 040634197 EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons MENU Button Press and release the MENU but ton to scroll through the main menus Fuel Economy Warnings Timer Units System Personal Set tings or to exit sub menus COMPASS Button Press and release the COMPASS button to display one of eight com pass readings and the outside temperature or to exit sub menus SELECT Button Press and release the SELECT button for access to main menus sub menus or t
18. Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 292 50 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a a a a a a a Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace engine air cleaner filter Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Drain the fuel filter water separator unit Replace the fuel filter water separator unit Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary Inspect the brake linings Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 293 62 500 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil tt Rotate tires If using your vehicle dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Drain the fuel filter water separator unit Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary Inspect the brake linings Inspect the manual transmission fluid add as necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and main sump filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code
19. The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS con sists of the following components Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire as sembly The matching full size spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster a LOW TIRE message will be displayed for a minimum of five sec onds and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recom mended cold placard pressure value The sys tem will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will extinguish once the up dated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and will remain on solid when a system fault is detected T
20. following precautions are not observed Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Continued 187 CAUTION Continued Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could acceler ate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to rotating the key to the LOCK position The key can only be re moved from the ignition when the ignition is in 188 the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK Brake Transmission Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmis sion Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the igni tion switch is in the ON or START posi
21. 145 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank NOTE When the ignition switch is turned to OFF the fuel and temperature gauges may not show accurate readings When the engine is not running turn the ignition switch to ON RUN to obtain accurate readings 2 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the elec trical charging system The light should come on when the ignition Switch is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charg ing system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDI ATELY See an authorized dealer 146 If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emer gencies 3 Front Fog Light Indicator This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 4 Low Fuel Warning Light When the fuel level reaches approxi mately 2 U S Gallons 7 6L this light will come on and remain on until fuel is added The Low Fuel Warning Light may turn on and off again especially during and after hard braking accelerations or turns This occurs due to the shifting of the fuel in the tank 5 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 6 Fr
22. 198 OROAR ee ey 198 Dual TOP dedo LR ERE 94 Electric Remote Mirrors 56 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet hee hoe be d 91 Electrical Power Outlets 91 Electronic Brake Control System 208 Brake Assist System 209 Electronic Roll Mitigation 211 Traction Control System 209 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 211 Electronic Speed Control Cruise CONO s sen podus um A 90 Electronic Stability Control ESC 212 Electronic Throttle Control Warning LONE PIECE 153 Electronic Vehicle Information Center e 154 158 Emergency Brake 206 Emergency In Case of Brake Warning Light 147 JACKING pica A RO 239 Jump Starting 242 Engine Air 254 Break In Recommendations 47 Compartment 249 250 Compartment Identification 249 250 Exhaust Gas Caution 48 Fails to Start 181 Flooded Starting 181 Fuel Requirements 273 Jump Starting 242 SIME C 252 273 Oil Change Interval 160 Oil Disposal ze ems 254 QUERIA 0 So a aa 254 Oil Selection 252 253 273 Overheating 238 Starting s xis dos e dudo 180 Temperature Gauge 149 Engine Oil Viscosity 2
23. For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets y with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets e Mix Ve Air is directed through the floor defrost x and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the wind shield Defrost Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting Air Conditioner Control Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual opera tion only When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified T air will flow through the 045607779 Outlets selected with the Mode control dial Press this button second time to turn OFF the air conditioning An LED in the button illuminates when manual compres sor operation is selected Recirculation Control The system will automatically con trol recirculation However press Cem ing the Recirculation Control but ton will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode ten min utes T
24. Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 294 75 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service 87 500 Miles 140 000 km or Schedule 84 Months Maintenance Service 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tt Schedule 21 Rotate tires Q Change the engine oil and engine oil Replace engine air cleaner filter filter Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Rotate tires 2 Drain the fuel filter water separator unit T If using your vehicle in dusty or off road 1 Replace the fuel filter water separator unit conditions inspect the engine air cleaner Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid filter and replace if necessary Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary Drain the fuel filter water separator unit 21 Inspect the brake linings Drain and refill the front and rear axle Replace the engine accessory drive belt fluid Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary Inspect the brake linings Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 295 Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace engine air cleaner filter Flush and replace the engine coolant antifreeze Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc
25. W16W Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 1 L E D Front Fog Lamps 2 PSX24W Rear Fog Lamps 2 P27 7W Front Direction Lamps 2 P27 7W Front Side Repeaters Side Marker Lamps 2 2 peo EE W5W Headlamps 2 H4 Front Position Lamps 2 12V14W Stop Rear Position Lamps 2 P27 7W Rear Direction Lamps 2 PY27 7 W License Lamp 2 W5W NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your local au thorized dealer If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate Two Door Models 18 5 Gallons 70 Liters Fuel Approximate Four Door Models 22 5 Gallons 85 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 8 Liter Engine 6 Quarts 5 7 Liters 2 8 Liter Diesel Engine 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters Cooling System 3 8 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula 13 Quarts 12 Liters or equivalent 2 8 Liter Diesel Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile 13 Quarts 12 Liters Formula or equivalent Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 273 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additiv
26. neered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Therefore do not add any fluid additives to the transmis Sion The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as hey may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmis Sion as the chemicals can damage your trans mission components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature 180 F 82 C This occurs after at least 15 miles 25 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips To properly check the automatic transmission fluid level the following procedure must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and nor mal operating temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 3 Fully apply the parking brake 4 Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear position ending with the shift lever in PARK 5 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating temperature Verify that a solid coating of oil is seen on both sides of the dipstick
27. 262 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Manual Transmission 263 Manual Transmission Equipped 263 e Transfer Case I Equipped 263 Front Rear Axle Fluid 2 2 2 2 la 264 Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion 264 FUSES 272 2200 S rime COE 268 Totally Integrated Power Module 268 SVEHIGEEISIOHAGENE 271 REPLACEMENT BULBS A 272 AELVUIDICAPACITES are a ene 273 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS 274 ENGINE E EE 274 e Chassis er E PCIE 275 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 8L 1 Integrated Power Module 2 Battery 3 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 4 Engine Oil Dipstick 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 071110765 7 Engine Coolant Reservoir 8 Engine Oil Fill 9 Air Cleaner Filter 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 11 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 249 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 81 DIESEL 1 Integrated Power Module 2 Battery 3 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 4 Engine Oil Fill 5 Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 9 Air Cleaner Filter 10 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 070606654 250 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II
28. 4 Italian Italiano Uconnect Tutorial hash language try again all all of them list names voice training system training Breakdown service list phones work call main menu return to main menu yes cancel mobile confirmation prompts confirmation mute on continue mute off delete new entry dial no 73 VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation This Voice Command system al lows you to control your AM FM VR radio disc player and memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death 74 When you press the Voice Command button you will hear beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the Voice Command button listen for the beep and say your com mand Pressing the Voice Command button while the system is speak
29. Full Off mode is intended for off road use only 214 Disabling ESC For Modified Vehicles AWD Models Only Vehicles modified with larger tires and or sus pension lifts may experience early ESC activa tions as compared to a non modified produc tion vehicle depending on lift size tire size suspension changes and or driving habits If early ESC activations are experienced while driving a modified vehicle the additional ability to permanently turn off ESC is available A steering wheel ESC button maneuver must be performed to permanently disable ESC and defeat the functionality of the ESC switch Re peating the procedure will return the system to normal ESC operation and restore ESC switch functionality allowing ESC Partial or Off modes WARNING With ESC in the permanent disable mode enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC and ERM systems is unavailable In an emer gency evasive maneuver the ESC and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintain ing stability This disabled mode is intended for off highway or off road use only Vehicle modifications requiring the owner to configure the vehicle in the ESC disabled mode will seriously affect the vehicle s roadworthiness and safety and may lead to loss of control and or accident resulting in possible serious or fatal injuries The following procedure will disable or re enable ESC functionality in the vehicle 1 Shift the transfer case
30. HOTOIL Transmission Temperature Warning Message The HOTOIL cluster message will appear the odometer accompanied with a chime to indicate that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing It may also occur when operating the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition such as 4 wheel drive operation e g snow plowing off road opera tion If this HOTOIL message turns on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the message turns off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature HOTOIL Warning message il luminated will eventually cause severe trans mission damage or transmission failure WARNING If the Transmission Temperature HOTOIL Warning message is illuminated and you con tinue operating the vehicle in some circum stances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire gASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system determines hat the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press he TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the mes sage will appear the next time the vehicle is started 151 noFUSE If the vehicle diagnostic sys
31. Mini Description tridge Fuse Fuse M34 10 Amp Park Assist Cli Red mate Control System Head lamp Wash Compass M35 10 Amp Heated Mirrors Red M36 20 Amp Power Outlet Yellow M37 10 Amp Anti Lock Brake Red System Elec tronic Stability Control Stop Lamp Switch Fuel Pump Relay M38 25 Amp Lock Unlock Mo Natural tors VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may e Remove Cartridge fuse J13 in the Power Distribution Center PDC labeled Ignition Off Draw IOD and store it in a safe location within the PDC e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure ad equate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the System is started again 271 REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Lights Bulb Type Auto Trans Indicator Lamp 658 Courtesy Lights Under Dash 1 906 Heater Control Lamps 2 194 Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp Rear Window Defogger and Rear Mii Soundbar Dome Lamp 912 Bulbs only available from authorized dealer 272 Exterior Lights Bulb Type Backup Lamps 2
32. Overheating Engine 149 238 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 6 Paint Cares ss chiesa EE 264 Paint Damage 264 Parking Brake 206 Passing LION oa ro td 85 Personal Settings 162 RO ede Ge 47 Phone Cellular 57 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 57 Polishing and Waxing 265 Power Door Locks s 21 aite pe eee 56 Steering 205 206 Windows 004 23 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 31 Preparation for Jacking 239 Pretensioners Seat Belts 30 Programmable Electronic Features Radial Ply Tires Radio Operation Radio Sound Systems Rear Axle Differential Rear Swing Gate Rear Window Defroster Rear Window Features Rear Wiper Washer Rearview Mirrors Recorder Event Data Recreational Towing Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral unu enixe ns AL ser sth dh Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral IN B PES eee odes Refrigerant Release Reminder Lights On Reminder Seat Belt Remote Control Door Locks Remote Keyless Entry Remote Sound System Radio ConttolS unes eec dos ate med Replacement Bulbs 272 Replacement Keys 14 Replacement Paris 251 Replacement Tires 219 Re
33. Power Mirrors If Equipped The power mirror switch is located on the center of the instrument panel below the cli mate controls A rotary knob selects the left mirror right mirror or off position Power Mirror Switch After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move Use the center off position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position Vanity Mirrors Vanity mirrors are located on the sun visors To use the mirrors rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward Vanity Mirror Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED NOTE For Uconnect Phone with Navigation ra dio refer to the Navigation radio Manual s separate booklet Uconnect Phone sec tion Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands e g Call Jim Work or Dial 151 1234 5555 Your mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s au dio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 1 0 or higher See Uconnect website for supported phones NOTE For Uconnect Phone customer support visit the following websites www chrysler
34. Seat CAUTION Repeated overheating of the seat could dam age the heating element and or degrade the material of the seat Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear 79 WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the ve hicle or occupying a seat Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Front Head Restraints To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint 80 Adjustment Button NOTE The rear head restraints are not adjustable To remove the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint to it s highest position push in both buttons at the base of each head restraint rod and simultaneously pull up on the head restraint Rear Head Restraints The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable head restraints Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things to Know Before Starting Your Ve hicle for information on ch
35. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn ON After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Once you repair or replace the origi nal road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pres sure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 223 FUEL REQUIREMENTS GASOLINE ENGINES This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality un eaded gasoline with a minimum research oc ane rating of 91 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit ov
36. Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the COMPASS button for approximately two seconds 3 Press the DOWN button until Compass Variance message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the COMPASS button to exit Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph 0 km h manual transmission or when he shift lever is in PARK auto transmission Press and release the MENU button until Per sonal Settings displays in the EVIC Use the DOWN button to display one of the ollowing choices Language When in this display you may select one of five anguages for all display nomenclature includ ing the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the SELECT button while in his display to select English Espanol or Fran cais Then as you continue the information will display in the selected language Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h When on is selected all doors will lock auto matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until On or Off appears Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and t
37. and pull it toward you until the seatback releases Pull Strap To Raise the Rear Seat Raise the seatback and lock it into place If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have diffi culty returning the seat to its proper position NOTE If the rear seatback is not fully latched the center shoulder belt will not be able to be extended for use If you cannot extend the center shoulder belt make sure your seat back is fully latched WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Release both the hood latches 031333906 Hood Latch Raise the hood and locate the safety latch ocated in the middle of the hood opening Push the latch to the left side of the vehicle to open the hood You may have to push down slightly on the hood before pushing the safety atch Insert the support rod into the slot on the hood To close the hood remove the support rod from he hood panel and place it in the retaining clip Lower the hood slowly Secure both of the hood atches WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is
38. assist braking on dry pavement or in mud and snow The vehicle begins from a stop in low gear with automatic upshift to second gear The vehicle will not shift into third gear 1 First This range is used for hard pulling at low speeds in mud sand snow or on steep grades The vehicle begins and stays in low gear with no upshift This gear provides engine compression braking at low speeds CAUTION e Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition from LOCK so the steering wheel and shift lever are re leased Otherwise damage to the steering column or shift lever could result e Never race the engine with the brakes on and the vehicle in gear and never hold the vehicle on an incline without applying the brakes These practices can overheat and damage the transmission e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving between DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored for abnor mal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the Trans mission Limp Home Mode will be engaged In his mode the transmission will operate when in DRIVE in second gear only To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever to the PARK position 3 Turn OFF the engine and be sure to turn the key fob t
39. automatically disengage when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 20 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 25 to 30 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure 182 NOTE The starter motor may run up to 30 seconds in very cold conditions until the engine is started The starter can be disengaged by turning the ignition key to the OFF position if required 5 Without Tip Start Feature Manual Transmission Only Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure 6 After the engine starts allow it to idle for approximately 30 seconds before driving This allows oil to circulate and lubricate the turbo charger Engine Warm Up Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold When starting a cold engine bring the engine up to operating speed slowly to allow the oil pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up NOTE High speed no load running of a cold en gine can result in excessive white smoke and poor engine performance No load en gine speeds should be kept under 1 200 rpm during the warm up period especially in cold ambient temperature conditions If temperatures are below 32 F 0 C operate t
40. causing a loss of vehicle control f required mounting posts must be prop erly installed if not equipped from the fac tory Continued 49 WARNING Continued Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make OutsideThe Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure 50 Lights Have someone observe the operation of exte rior lights while you work the controls Check urn signal and high beam indicator lights on he instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and lock ing Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight park ing for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid eaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MIRRORS TU 56 e Inside Day Night 56 AUS MITOS E PEE 56 e Power Mirrors If Equipped 56
41. e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near sea coast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Bird droppings Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or equivalent or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e f insects tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax or equivalent to re move road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or re moval of paint and decals Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercar riage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and tail gate are kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is consid
42. for more details Service Park Assist System with a single chime Oil Change Required with a single chime ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped Stop Start Not Ready Diesel Manual Transmission Only refer to Stop Start Sys tem in Starting And Operating for more details Stop Start Ready Diesel Manual Transmis sion Only refer to Stop Start System in Starting And Operating for more details Stop Start Auto Stop Active Diesel Manual Transmission Only refer to Stop Start Sys tem in Starting And Operating for more details 159 Stop Start Key Start Required Diesel Manual Transmission Only refer to Stop Start System in Starting And Operating for more details Service Stop Start System Diesel Manual Transmission Only refer to Stop Start Sys tem in Starting And Operating for more details Stop Start System Page Diesel Manual Transmission Only refer to Stop Start Sys tem in Starting And Operating for more details Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Re quired message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next sched uled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal
43. intended path ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel po sition e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel po sition The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as pos sible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving o the prevailing road conditions WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from act ing on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road condi tions The ESC cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery sur faces or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be ex ploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESC system has three available operating modes in 4H range The system has one oper ating mo
44. mance may be compromised with the con vertible top down Phone Far End Audio Performance Audio quality is maximized under low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed low road noise smooth road surface fully closed windows dry weather conditions and operation from the driver seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system perfor mance may be compromised with the con vertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose con nection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system 69 70 Voice Tree Main Menu Breakdown English uconnect ES Espanol Francais Last See Sous 2 Phonebook umber on tone Flowchart is redialed See Setup Flowchart The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated Num
45. than 1096 of the trailer load Tongue weight must not exceed the lesser of either the hitch certification rating or the trailer tongue chassis rating It should never be less than 4 of the trailer load and not less than 55 lbs 25 kg You must consider tongue load as part of the load on your vehicle and its GAWR 228 WARNING An improperly adjusted hitch system may reduce handling stability and braking perfor mance and could result in an accident Con sult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable trailer caravan dealer for addi tional information Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multi plied by the maximum width of the front of a railer Breakaway Cable Attachment European braking regulations for braked trail ers up to 7 700 lbs 3 500 kg require trailers to be fitted with either a secondary coupling or breakaway cable The recommended location for attaching the normal trailers breakaway cable is in the stamped slot located on the sidewall of the hitch receiver With Attachment Point e For detachable tow bar pass the cable through the attachment point and clip it back onto itself 818e675b Detachable Ball Clip Loop Method For fixed ball tow bar attach the clip directly Without Attachment Points For fixed ball tow bar loop the cable around to the designated point This alternative must the neck of the tow ball If you fit the cable be specifically permi
46. wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity and the narrower track if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other ve hicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully 010308790 Rollover Warning Label Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up IMPORTANT NOTICE ALL MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS PUBLI CATION IS BASED ON THE LATEST INFORMA TION AVAILABLE AT TIME OF PUBLICATION APPROVAL THE RIGHT IS RESERVED TO PUBLISH REVISIONS AT ANY TIME This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering spe cialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supple mented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Fol lowing the instructions and recommendations in this Owner s Manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle After you have
47. 29 Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped n this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger seating positions with a combination lap shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating posi ion that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down ward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode 30 How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage he Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increas
48. 330 300 PORTUGAL Chrysler Portugal S A Qta da Fonte Edif D Am lia Rua Victor Camara 2 18 2770 229 Paco de Arcos Portugal Tel 351 0 21 323 91 00 Fax 4351 0 21 323 91 99 306 PUERTO RICO AND U S VIRGIN ISLANDS Chrysler International Services S A P O Box 191857 San Juan 009191857 Tel 7877825757 Fax 7877823345 ROMANIA S C Auto Rom S R L Bucuresti Bd Expozitiei nr 2 RO 78334 Tel 01 2240020 25 Fax 01 2241638 RUSSIA Chrysler RUS SAO 39A Leningradsky prospect 125167 Moscow Tel 7 495 745 2600 Fax 7 495 745 2601 SLOVENIA Chrysler Jeep Import d d Leskoskova 2 1122 Ljubljana Tel 01 5843 138 Fax 01 5843 222 SPAIN Chrysler Espa a S L Dpto De Atenci n al Cliente Chrysler Jeep y Dodge Apdo De Correos 24 19200 Azuqueca de Henares Guadalajara Tel 902 888 782 Fax 913 496 529 SWEDEN Chrysler Sverige Bronsyxegatan 14 Box 50530 5 202 50 Malm Tel 46 0 8 752 9858 Fax 46 0 8 752 6483 SWITZERLAND Chrysler Switzerland GmbH Bernstrasse 55 CH 8952 Schlieren Tel e German 0800 80 29 20 e French 0800 80 29 21 e talian 0800 80 29 22 Telefax 41 0 44 755 64 00 TAIWAN Chrysler Taiwan Co LTD 13th Floor Union Enterprise Plaza 1109 Min Sheng East Road Section 3 Taipei Taiwan R O C Tel 080081581 Fax 886225471871 TURKEY Chrysler Jeep Tic A S TEM Otoyolu Hadimkoy Cikisi 34900 Buyukcekmece Istanbul Tel 9
49. Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by rinsing the top thoroughly with clean water Remember to allow the top to dry before owering it CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew on the top material Avoid high pressure car washes as they can damage the top material Also in creased water pressure may force past the weather strips Continued CAUTION Continued e t is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior Use care when washing the vehicle water pressure directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicle s interior Careless handling and storage of the re movable roof panels may damage the Seals causing water to leak into the vehi cle s interior e The front panel s must be positioned prop erly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle s interior Care of Fabric Top Windows CAUTION Your vehicle s fabric top has pliable plastic windows which can be scratched unless spe cial care is taken by following these directions 1 Never use a dry cloth to remove dust In stead use a microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moistened with cold or warm clean water and wipe across the window not up and dow
50. E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Ethanol The manufacturer recommends that your ve hicle be operated on fuel containing no more than 10 ethanol Purchasing your fuel from a reputable supplier may reduce the risk of ex ceeding this 10 limit and or of receiving fuel with abnormal properties It should also be noted that an increase in fuel consumption should be expected when using ethanol blended fuels due to the lower energy content of ethanol Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol CAUTION Use of fuel with ethanol content higher than 1096 may result in engine malfunction starting and operating difficulties and materials degra dation These adverse effects could result in permanent damage to your vehicle Clean Air Gasoline Many gasolines are now being blended that contribute to cleaner air especially in those areas where air pollution levels are high These new blends provide a cleaner burning fuel and some are referred to as reformulated gaso line The manufacturer supports these efforts toward cleaner air You can help by using these blends as they become available MMT in Gasoline MT is a manganese containing metalli
51. How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better under standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law enforcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash in vestigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the ve hicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equipment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Children 12 years and under should ride prop erly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual
52. If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two cold lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at ap proximately 70 F 21 C room tempera ture If the fluid level is correctly estab lished at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 21 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release the parking brake NOTE To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dip Stick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Manual Transmission The clutch hydraulic system is a sealed maintenance free system In the event of leak age or other
53. Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission 149 24 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom mended by the vehicle manufac turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pres sure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pres sure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability 150 Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger i
54. Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires 7 500 Miles 12 000 km or Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 15 000 Miles 24 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a a a a Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tF Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 280 22 500 Miles 36 000 km or 30 000 Miles 48 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule l Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tt 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Q Rotate tires filter tt Replace the engine air cleaner filter Rotate tires 1 Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes T Inspect the brake linings replace if Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet necessary off road or frequent trailer towing T Inspect exhaust syste
55. Qauge 2a ee yh PAS S ey 146 Octane Rating 224 H gulrements c a bees 273 Tank Capacity 273 FUSES 2 a ters 268 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 226 227 251 Gasoline Clean Air 225 Gasoline Fuel 224 Gauges Coolant Temperature 149 FUG es ee SRE ma eas 146 Odometer 150 Speedometer 146 Tachometer sedate ace xs 148 Gear Ranges 186 188 191 Gear Select Lever Override 244 General Information 15 17 Glass Cleaning 266 Glow Plug Light 154 Gross Axle Weight Rating 227 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 227 Hands Free Phone Uconnect Hard TOD s iue aa RR m 97 Top Modular 97 Hard Top Removal 100 Hazard Warning Flasher 238 Head Restraints 79 Head Rests 79 Headlights Dimmer Switch 85 grues 87 SWIC 4 64 a 83 Heater 165 High Beam Indicator 147 Hill Descent Control 216 Hill Descent Control Indicator 216 Hill Start Assist 209 Holder Cup 93 Hood Release 83 Hydraulic Clutch 263 ONION cue ae deme donee 13 Key zx Rie d 6E dei ee DOS d 13 gnition Key Removal 1
56. To combine two calls refer to Conference Call Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the button until you hear single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time 63 Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the button while call is in progress and make second phone call as described under Mak ing a Second Call While Current Call in Prog ress After the second call has established press and hold the button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is c
57. U U ey of letters used in the table above U Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group UF Suitable for forward facing universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group L Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list These restraints may be of the specific vehicle restricted or universal categories B Built in restraint approved for this mass group 42 X Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor posi tion directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap ISOFIX Child Seat Anchorage System Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called ISO FIX The ISOFIX system provides for the instal ation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper ether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure SOFIX compatible child restraint systems are now available However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attach ments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using
58. When e Actual cabin temperature is significantly dif ferent than temperature set on Auto HVAC e HVAC is set to full defrost mode e STOP START AUTO STOP ACTIVE time ex ceeds 5 minutes e Battery voltage drops too low e Low brake vacuum e g after several brake pedal applications e Vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph 5 km h e STOP START OFF switch is pressed e AWD system is put into 4LO mode Conditions that force a manual key cycle start while in STOP START AUTO STOP AC TIVE mode The Engine Will Not Start Automatically If e The driver s seatbelt was unbuckled e The engine hood has been opened A STOP START system error occurs The engine may then only be restarted with an ignition key cycle The STOP START KEY START REQUIRED message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC under these conditions Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further in formation To Manually Turn Off The Start Stop System 1 Press the STOP START Off switch located on the switch bank The light on the switch will illuminate STOP START OFF Switch 2 The STOP START OFF message will appear in Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 3 Atthe next vehicle stop after turning off the STOP START system the eng
59. a a a a a Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary t Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Inspect the transfer case fluid Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 285 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 97 500 Miles 156 000 km or 105 000 Miles 168 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a O O Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tF Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or
60. alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally in jured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit fea ture is enabled 2 The transmission was in gear and the ve hicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission shift lever is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Oycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Press the power door unlock switch to un lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws 21 Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions ar
61. along the top and rear of the window Repeat this step for the opposite side 132 15 Locate the black swing gate bar Slide the swing gate bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear window The spongy part of the seal should be down and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate when closed 81b34ac6 16 Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends at the lower left corner of the rear window opening Ensure that the zippers are properly started and aligned before zipping to prevent damage 17 Run the first zipper fully around to the right side of the window 18 Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the swing gate brackets 19 Insert the rear window retainer into the swing gate bracket on both the left and right sides 20 Complete the installation of the sail panel by inserting the rest of the retainer into the body channel 21 Close the header latches and return the sun visors to their secured position SUNRIDER TWO DOOR MODELS IF EQUIPPED CAUTION Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior NOTE If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph 64 km h with the Sunrider feature open it is recommended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle 133 Opening the Sunrider 1 Unclip and move the sun visors to
62. and passenger Operation of the system is quite simple 1 Turn the Mode Control knob on the right and the Blower Control knob on the left to AUTO 168 NOTE The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only 2 Dial in the tempera ture you would like the system to maintain by rotating the ture Control knob Once the comfort level is se lected the system will 045607778 Maintain that level auto matically using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air condition ing the system will automatically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function auto matically Selecting the O OFF position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake The recommended setting for maximum com fort is 72 F 22 C for the average person however this may vary NOTE e The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation e Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not nec essary e If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation
63. at slower speeds shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case into 4L Low if necessary Do not shift to a lower gear han necessary to maintain headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and raction will be lost If you start to slow to a stop ry turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth while still ap plying throttle This will allow the tires to get a resh bite and help maintain your momentum 199 CAUTION On icy or slippery roads do not downshift at high engine RPM or vehicle speeds because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control Mud Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires and is very difficult to get hrough You should use second gear manua ransmission or DRIVE automatic transmis sion with the transfer case in the 4L Low position to maintain your momentum If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting uck They are normally full of debris from revious vehicles getting stuck As a good ractice before entering any mud hole get out nd determine how deep it is if there are any idden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck e a2 200 Sand Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire pressure When crossin
64. beam headlights are on Push the multifunc tion control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever towards you to switch the headlights back to low beam If the driver s door is open and the headlights or park lights are left on the high beam indicator light will remain illuminated and a chime will sound 11 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake func tions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Pro gram ESP system In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been cor rected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which
65. because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Select the Out side Air position for maximum defogging The A C will engage automatically to pre vent fogging when the recirculation but ton is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or panel floor The A C can be deselected manually with out disturbing the mode control selection When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled Air Conditioning Control Press this button to en gage the Air Condition ing A light will illumi nate when the Conditioning System is 7 engaged Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indi cates cooler tempera tures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer tempera tures NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds MAX A C For maximum cooling turn on the A C and recirculation buttons at the same time e ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature 045607557 167 Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped 045607777 Automatic Temperature Control Automatic Operation The Automatic Temperature Control system au tomatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver
66. clicks are heard CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap e poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system e A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to turn on e To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full WARNING Remove the fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap slowly to prevent fuel spray from the filler neck which may cause injury The volatility of some gasolines may cause a buildup of pressure in the fuel tank that may increase while you drive This pres sure can result in a spray of gasoline and or vapors when the cap is removed from a hot vehicle Removing the cap slowly allows the pressure to vent and prevents fuel spray Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is re moved or the tank is being filled Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Tighten the gas cap until you hear clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster m
67. com Uconnect www dodge com Uconnect www jeep com Uconnect Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the Uconnect Phone and your mo bile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the Uconnect Phone s microphone for private conversation The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free profile mobile phone Uconnect Phone features Bluetooth tech nology the global standard that enables dif ferent electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so 57 Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is urned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone al ows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to he system Only one linked or paired mobile phone can be used with the Uconnect Phone at a time The Uconnect Phone is available in English Dutch French German Italian or Spanish languages as equipped WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death Uconnect Phone Button The radio or steering wheel con trols if equipped will contain the two control buttons Uconnect Ph
68. compass readings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing WARNING Even if the display still reads a few degrees above 32 F 0 C the road surface may be icy particularly in woods or on bridges Drive carefully under such conditions to prevent an accident and possible personal injury or prop erty damage Automatic Compass Calibration The self calibrating feature of the compass eliminates the need to calibrate the compass or normal conditions During a short initia period the compass may appear erratic and he CAL symbol will appear blinking on the display After the vehicle has completed at east one complete circle under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from large metal objects cali bration will be complete when the CAL indica or turns off After initial calibration the compass will con inue to automatically update this calibration whenever the vehicle is in motion 155 good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges under ground cables railroad tracks etc Magnetic and battery powered devices such as cell phones iPod s radar detec tors PDA s and laptops should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel This is where the compass module is located and such devices may interfere and cause false compass readings Manual Compass Calibration NOTE Before attempting a manual compas
69. control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out o position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury Always make sure that floor mats are prop erly attached to the floor mat fasteners Continued WARNING Continued e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle e Never put floor mats or other floor cover ings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving Objects can become trapped un der the brake pedal and accelerator pedal
70. duras qur e de la Stn a 86 Check Engine Malfunction sd eR Re 152 CRUISE 2 2 Bok be Bad 149 Dimmer Switch Headlight 85 Electronic Stability Program ESP ndicator acile meae a ds 153 215 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 153 Engine Temperature Warning 148 EXIeTlOU n cd gos ob nm rene 50 LOU des been den ok Go 85 Glow Plug Light 154 Hazard Warning Flasher 238 315 Headlight Leveling 87 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Monitor Tire Pressure System 221 Headlight Switch 83 use m peo 42 44 Mopar Parts 251 HigliBeatm aux mmn 147 Lubrication Body 255 Multi Function Control Lever 83 High Beam Indicator 147 Hill Descent Control Indicator 216 aintenance Free 254 New Vehicle Break In Period 47 nstrument Cluster 83 aintenance Procedures 251 42 2 mgr aintenance Schedule 278290 Occupant Restraints 24 ys Puel MEME 146 Diesel 290 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 224 Oil Bises x 146 alfunction Indicator Light Check Odometer 150 154 LLLI URS ue 152 149 150 154 Passing 85 anual Transmission 185 263 c ina ff Bea
71. each tire go through the obstacle indepen dently You need to use caution when crossing large obstacles with steep sides Do not at tempt to cross any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover If you get caught in a rut dig a small trench to the right or left at a 45 degree angle ahead of the front tires Use he removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the urnout you just created You should now be able to drive out following the trench you just created at a 45 degree angle WARNING There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an obstacle at any angle with steep sides Crossing Logs To cross a log approach it at a slight angle approximately 10 to 15 degrees This allows one front tire to be on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the log While climbing the log modulate your brake and accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your tires Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes CAUTION Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will become high centered Getting High Centered If you get hung up or high centered on an object get out of the vehicle and try to deter mine what the vehicle is hung up on where it is contacting the underbody and what is the best direction to recover the vehicle Depending on what you are in contact with jack the
72. following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equip ment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in com bination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR 227 WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the ve hicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force ex erted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 7 or more
73. fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is based on the most recent trip information Average Fuel Economy x Fuel Remaining This display cannot be reset Elapsed Time ET This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time since the last reset Trip Odometer ODO ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Press and release the right button on the instrument cluster to switch from odom eter to Trip A or Trip B or to ECO Press and hold the right button while the odometer trip odometer is displayed to reset Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO ON indicator will illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to in crease fuel economy The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO ON depending on driving habits and vehicle usage Compass Temperature Display NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with a Chrysler Uconnect gps Navigation Radio the NAV system will provide the compass direction and the variance and calibration menus will be unavailable The compass will perform accurately based on GPS signals instead of the Earth s magnetic field This display provides the outside temperature and one of eight
74. in transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 1 With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade screw driver to pry the 18 two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Use extreme care not to damage the seal or inter nal components 81182c72 Separating RKE Key Fob Halves 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together DOORS CAUTION Careless handling and storage of the remov able door panels may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehicle s inte rior Upper Half Door Window Removal If Equipped 1 Grasp the half door window and pull up ward Upper Half Door Window Upper Half Door Window Installation f Equipped 1 Grasp the half door window and line up pins into pockets in lower door 2 Push down to ensure the half door window is fully seated Front Door Removal 1 Remove the hinge pin screws from the up per and lower outside hinges using a 50 Torxe head driver Hinge Pin Screw 2 Unplug the wirin
75. ing this three second window Compass Display ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing Press and release the COMPASS button to display one of eight com pass readings and the outside temperature NOTE The system will display the last known out side temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is dis played Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore tem perature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped The ECO message will display below the out side temperature in the EVIC display This message will appear whenever you are driving in a fuel efficient manner This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to in crease fuel economy Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which elimi nates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A goo
76. instructions de scribed in your mobile phone User s Manual List Paired Mobile Phone Names Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the 4 VR button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select Another Mobile Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts 67 e You also press the button at time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and foll
77. into the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the condenser located in front of the radia tor for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air con ditioning performance 166 Mode Control Air Direction Rotate this control to choose from several patterns of air distribu tion You can select ei ther a primary mode as identified by the sym bols on the control or a 045607541 blend of two of these modes The closer the setting is to a particular symbol the more air distribution you receive from that mode Panel 7 Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets y with a
78. into the 4H range position 2 Turn the steering wheel until it is centered and the wheels are pointed straight ahead 3 Cycle the ignition key OFF to ON 4 Wait approximately five seconds for the sys tem bulb check 5 Turn and hold the steering wheel one half turn to the right clockwise 6 Press and hold the ESC OFF button for seven seconds 7 Turn the steering wheel back to center and turn and hold an additional one half turn to the left counterclockwise 8 Press and hold the ESC OFF button for seven seconds 9 Turn the steering wheel back to center 10 Press and hold the ESC OFF button for seven seconds 11 Cycle the ignition key to OFF After performing the ESC disable procedure correctly ESC OFF will be displayed in the odometer for approximately 12 seconds each time the ignition is moved to ON Repeating the ESC disable procedure will re enable normal ESC operation ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the igni ee tion switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kil
79. level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Check the manual transmission fluid level CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals Severe Duty Conditions Tt Change the engine oil and engine oil filter at every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or three months if using your vehicle under any of the following severe duty conditions e Stop go driving e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service commercial service e Off road or desert operation 279 6 Months
80. on your vehicle that it has an airbag system 37 Airbag Warning Light o Y You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision The Airbag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associ ated with airbag system electrical components While the airbag system is de signed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the airbag system immediately The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position e The Airbag Warning Light remains on after he four to eight second interval e The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermit ently or remains on while driving Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or 38 hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened
81. or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to he next detent position to brighten the odom eter and radio when the parking lights or head ights are on 85 Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting 4 Y Dimmer Control 031407686 Interior Lights The overhead light will come on when a door is opened It may also be turned on by rotating the control for the dimmer switch on the multi function lever fully upward The overhead light will automatically turn off in approximately 10 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left in the dome light position Turn the ignition switch ON to restore the overhead light operation 86 Cargo Lamp The courtesy and dome lights will turn on when the front doors are opened by rotating the control for the dimmer switch on the multifunc tion lever fully upward or if equipped when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The sports bar reading lights available on four door models can be turned on by press ing the switches located on either side of the lens Press a switch a second time to turn the light off Sports Bar Reading Light The rear cargo light may be turned on by pressing the lens Press the lens a second time to turn the light off E y 031434793 Rear Cargo Light When a door is open and the interior lights a
82. panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Ad vanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to their full size The airbags fully inflate 35 in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The airbags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB Inflator Units If Equipped The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags nflator Units if equipped are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires he side airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating side airbag exits hrough the seat seam into the space between he occupant and the door The side airbags fully inflate in about 10 mil
83. portions the usable torque by providing more torque to the wheel that has traction Trac Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions With both rear wheels on a slippery surface a slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum traction WARNING On vehicles equipped with a limited slip differ ential never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground The vehicle may drive through the rear wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose control of your vehicle AXLE LOCK TRU LOK RUBICON MODELS The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instru ment panel to the left of the steering column Axle Lock Switch This feature will only activate when the following conditions are met e Key in ignition vehicle in 4L Low range e Vehicle speed should be 10 mph 16 km h or less To activate the system press the bottom of the AXLE LOCK switch once to lock the rear axle only the Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate press the bottom of the switch again to lock the front axle the Front Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate When the rear axle is locked pressing the switch again will lock or unlock the front axle The indicator lights will flash until the axles are fully locked or unlocked To unlock the axles press the top of the AXLE LOCK switch Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L Low range o
84. reduce the potential for automatic transmis sion overheating select O D OFF when driv ing in hilly areas or shift the transmission to DRIVE position 2 on more severe grades Refer to Automatic Transmission in Starting and Operating for further information Electronic Speed Control If Equipped not in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you expe rience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily Trailer Hitch Attaching Points Your vehicle will require extra equipment to tow a trailer safely and efficiently The trailer tow hitch must be attached to your vehicle using the provided attaching points on the vehicle s frame Refer to the following chart to determine the accurate attaching points Other equip ment such as trailer sway controls and braking equipment trailer equalizing leveling equip ment and low profile mirrors may also be required or strongly recommended M 7 MOUNTING HOLES ae 47 Sal VEH
85. seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as nec essary to allow the belt to go around your lap 1 Pulling Out the Lap Shoulder Belt Latch Plate 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle WARNING e Abelt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you belt that is loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snug Continued WARNING Continued worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that the strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during an accident You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the ap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To oosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug
86. seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as imme diately Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC system serviced as well Do not attempt to modify any part of your airbag system The airbag may inflate ac cidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any airbag sys tem service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the airbag system for persons with disabilities contact your authorized dealer WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag System could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steer ing wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper or vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards e You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters e t is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works
87. sediment clean and flush with reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with thorough rinsing to re move all deposits and chemicals Properly dis pose of the old engine coolant antifreeze Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance interval Selection Of Engine Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended en gine coolant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lu bricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information CAUTION Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than the specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the Specified engine coolant antifreeze as Soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the antifreeze engine coolant anti freeze and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine cool ant antifreeze Use of Propylene Glycol base engine coolant antifreeze is not rec ommended Adding Engine Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows ex ended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be u
88. spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Do not allow petroleum based fluid to con taminate the brake fluid Brake seal com ponents could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in an accident 261 Automatic Transmission If Equipped Selection of Lubricant t is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmis Sion performance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmission fluid Refer to Flu ids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main aining Your Vehicle for further information It is important that the transmission fluid be main ained at the prescribed level using the recom mended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved ubricant may be used CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause dete rioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recom mended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Ve hicle for further information 262 Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engi
89. system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized tech nician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged dete riorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or oose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will de stroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause seri ous damage to the engine Under normal operating conditions the cata ytic converter will not require maintenance However it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst opera ion and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your ve hicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat result ing in possible damage to the converter and vehicle WARNING A hot exh
90. the key to the LOCK position before restart ing Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the engine if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first PARK This gear position supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first then place he shift lever in the PARK position WARNING Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the park ing brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in REVERSE You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal 191 REVERSE Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Shift into NEUTRAL when the vehicle is stand ing for prolonged periods with the engine run ning The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other re
91. the main menu In this mode you can say the following com mands Radio to switch to the radio mode Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio e Main Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands enu to switch to the radio menu enu to switch to the main menu e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio e Main Menu to switch to the main menu enu to switch to the radio menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you may say the following commands e Track to change the track e Next Track to play the next track e Previous Track to play the previous track e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say In this mode you may say the follow ing commands e New Memo to record a new mem
92. the side 2 Release the header latches from the loops on the windshield frame 3 Slide the plastic sleeve forward 134 4 Grasp the header and lift the top back Make sure the material is folded back as shown NOTE The Sunrider latch on the door rail should not be activated for Sunrider use If acti vated the soft top must be reinstalled start ing from the sail panels 5 Locate the straps to secure the side bows Wrap the straps around the bows as shown Repeat on the other side 036107475 6 Reposition the sun visors Closing the Sunrider 1 Remove the straps from the side bows 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 3 Grasp the front header and pull it to the front of the vehicle 4 Hook the header latches to the loops on the windshield frame close latches and return the sun visors to their original positions 5 Slide the plastic sleeve rearward over the Sunrider link SUNRIDER FOUR DOOR MODELS IF EQUIPPED CAUTION Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior NOTE If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph 64 km h with the Sunrider feature open it is recommended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle Opening the Sunrider 1 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 2 Release the header latches from the loops on the windshield fr
93. the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will in crease the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is sus pected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as anticipated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer 206 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power Steering system as the chemicals can dam age your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accu rate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK or manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear The parking brake lever is located i
94. the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current uel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or ve hicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the ve hicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and new DTE value will display Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function reset ALL will display dur
95. to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how Strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 105 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 105 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the ISOFIX child restraint anchorage system Refer to ISOFIX Child Seat Anchorage System WARNING e Rearward facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airb
96. to edit e When prompted recite the new phone num ber for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit fea ture 62 NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the 4 VR button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile other or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook
97. transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 L Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 287 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t Rotate tires 127 500 Miles 204 000 km or Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 135 000 Miles 216 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tF Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 288 142 500 Miles 228 000 km or
98. travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Over loading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to the brakes axle engine transmission steering sus pension chassis structure or tires Continued WARNING Continued Safety chains must always be used be tween your vehicle and trailer Always con nect the chains to the frame or hook retain ers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the park ing brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed be tween the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch GAWR utilized Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential for the safe and satisfacto
99. vehicle 2 Move the shift lever to the PARK position 3 Turn OFF the engine and be sure to turn the key to the LOCK position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds then restart the engine 5 Move the shift lever to the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the trans mission will return to normal operation If the problem persists PARK REVERSE and NEU TRAL will continue to operate Only second gear range will operate in the DRIVE position Have the transmission checked at your autho rized dealer as soon as possible Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmis Sion on your vehicle A clutch within the torque onverter engages automatically at a cali rated speed at light throttle It engages at igher speeds under heavier acceleration This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high gear hen the vehicle speed drops below a cali brated speed or during acceleration the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages NOTE If the vehicle has not been driven in several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid par tially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmis sion The torque converter will refill within five seconds of starti
100. vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recom mended cold parked for more than three hours air pressure of 35 psi 241 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi 207 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi 207 kPa but the Tire Pressure Moni oring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value CAUTION e TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels The TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replace ment equipment that is not of the same Size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result Continued 221 CAUTION Continued e After inspecting or adjusti
101. weight stamped on your trailer hitch 230 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options dealer installed options must be consid ered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard located on the drivers door pillar for the maximum combined weight of occu pants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended CAUTION e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury acci dent Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during
102. will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level conditions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is necessary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Elec ronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is re quired Operation of the brake warning light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for approximately two sec onds The light should then turn off unless the 147 parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN position NOTE This light shows only that the parking b
103. windshield loops do not close the latches 10 If the swing gate brackets were removed install them by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior side of the body chan nel Then rotate it rearward and over the chan nel until it snaps onto the exterior part of the rail To be properly located the bracket must only be clipped to the shortened rail edge 81 34 11 Ensure that the straps are positioned cor rectly before pulling the sail panels over the rear roof bow 4 bow Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body side channel leaving the last 3 in 7 6 cm toward the rear window loose on both sides Pulling down on the rear roof bow 4 bow will aid in reaching the channel with the retainers 12 To install the side windows affix the win dow temporarily by attaching it to the Velcro in the upper rear corner Start the zipper but close only about 1 in 2 5 cm 13 Insert the front retainer of the window into the door channel making sure the retainer is fully seated and properly positioned on the door frame Failure to do so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window 1 Incorrect Insertion 2 Correct Insertion 14 Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side channel be ginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle Finish by closing the zipper com pletely and attaching the Velcro
104. you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional informa tion on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode description under Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions section The chart below 46 defines the seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate Driver Center Passen ger CRS CRS CRS Lock Lock Lock First Row ALR Second ALR ALR ALR Row Third Row Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR 1 To install a child restraint with ALR first pul enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Next extract al the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor As the belt retracts you will hear a ratcheting sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode 2 Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child re straint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary To attach a child restraint tether strap Tether Strap Mounting Two Door Models Tether Strap Mounting Four Door Models Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the ba
105. 0 212 867 40 00 Fax 4 90 212 867 44 63 UKRAINE JSC AutoCapital Velyka Vasylkivska str 15 01004 Kyiv Tel 38 044 206 8888 Fax 38 044 206 8889 UNITED KINGDOM Chrysler UK Ltd Tongwell Milton Keynes MK15 8BA Tel 01908 301090 Fax 01908 301203 URUGUAY Malunix S A Miguelete 2276 Montevideo Uruguay Tel 598 2 401 7818 Fax 598 2 402 2666 VENEZUELA Chrysler de Venezuela LLC Avenida Pancho Pepe Croquer Zona Industrial Norte Valencia Estado Caraboro Tel 58 241 613 2400 Fax 58 241 613 2538 Fax 58 241 6132602 58 241 6132438 PO BOX 1960 Services And Parts Zona Industrial 11 Av Norte Sur 5 C C Calle Este Oeste C C LD Center Local B 2 Valencia Estado Carabobo Telf 58 241 6132757 58 241 6132773 Fax 58 241 6132743 307 308 MODEL CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP NOTIFICATION REGISTRATION OR LICENSE NUMBER NEW OWNER S NAME NEW OWNER S ADDRESS TELEPHONE NO vin IF RESOLD BY CHRYSLER JEEP DEALERSHIP ENTER DEALER STAMP IN BOX ABOVE FIRST OWNER 80140712 MODEL CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP NOTIFICATION REGISTRATION OR LICENSE NUMBER NEW OWNER S NAME NEW OWNER S ADDRESS TELEPHONE NO vin IF RESOLD BY CHRYSLER JEEP DEALERSHIP ENTER DEALER STAMP IN BOX ABOVE SECOND OWNER 80140753 309 310 BS Anti Lock Brake System
106. 235 9220 Fax 504 232 6564 HUNGARY Chrysler Automotive Hungaria Kft H 1133 Budapest K rp t u 21 Tel 36 1 887 7000 Fax 36 1 887 7098 IRELAND C J IRELAND CONCESSIONAIRES LIMITED Clonlara Avenue Baldonnell Business Park Baldonnell Dublin 22 Ireland Tel 1890 946866 ITALY Chrysler Italia S r l Via Giulio Vincenzo Bona 110 00156 Roma Tel 06 41442812 Fax 06 418823114 E mail talkto chrysler com LATVIA TC MOTORS LTD 40 Krasta Str LV 1003 Riga Tel 07 812 312 FAX 07 812 313 LITHUANIA Silberauto AS Laisves av 125 A LT 2022 VILNIUS Tel 02 301037 Fax 02 301036 NETHERLANDS Chrysler Nederland B V Postbus 2088 NL 3500 GB Utrecht Tel 31 0 30 247 19 11 Fax 31 0 30 247 16 00 NEW ZEALAND Chrysler New Zealand Private Bag 14907 Panmure New Zealand Tel 09573 7800 Fax 09573 7808 NORWAY Chrysler Norge A S Solheimveien 7 N 1471 L renskog Tel 47 67 92 60 00 Fax 47 67 90 53 10 PANAMA Grupo Q de Panam Calle 50 Final Edificio 68 San Francisco Panam Panam Tel 507 303 1100 Fax 507 303 0980 PARAGUAY Cencar S A Avda Mariscal Lopez No 5700 Asuncion Paraguay Tel 59521515911 Fax 59521515924 305 PERU Divemotor S A Calle Alejandro Bussalleu 151 Urb Sta Catalina La Victoria Lima Peru Tel 51 1 712 2000 Fax 51 1 712 2002 POLAND Chrysler Polska Sp z o o ul Gotlieba Daimlera 1 02 480 Warszawa Tel 801
107. 3 lluminated Entry 16 mmobilizer Sentry Key 14 nfant Restraint 39 nflation Pressure Tires 217 nformation Center Vehicle 158 nside Rearview Mirror 56 nstrument Cluster 144 nstrument Panel and Controls 143 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 266 ntegrated Power Module Fuses 268 Interior Appearance Care 265 nterior Lights o s ea ohm 86 ntermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 88 Introduction sss ko kx 4 Jack Location eo Ra 239 Jack Operation 239 240 Jacking Instructions 240 Jump Starting 242 Key Programming 15 Key Replacement 14 Key Sentry Immobilizer 14 Reminder 13 Keyless Entry System 16 K yS wid Satie edhe ge dda amp bh 13 Lane Change and Turn Signals 146 Lane Change Assist 85 Lap ds 25 Lap Shoulder Belts 25 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildten 222 556 EE 42 44 Latches uo ea xe hr Ah i 50 Leaks gt iem oxi Rome 50 Leveling Headlight 87 Light BulbS is temen 50 l8 o n Er 50 83 AlIbag ees men Rs 35 38 49 148 149 AntFLOCK ous EIAS 148 Anti Lock Warning 148 Brake Assist Warning 215 Brake Warning 147 Calo
108. 53 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart 253 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 36 Entry System Illuminated 16 Ethanol 5 us ara a 224 Event Data Recorder 38 Exhaust Gas Caution 48 Exhaust System 48 256 Exterior Finish Care 264 Exterior LightS 50 Fabric Care 265 266 Fabric TOD rc re xD need 266 Filters Air 254 314 Air Conditioning 173 Engine Oil is sex nan 254 Finish eo RR ko 264 Flashers Hazard Warning 238 Turn Signal 2 50 146 Flooded Engine Starting 181 Fluid Capacities 273 FU beaks ue mmc 50 Fluid Level Checks 264 Automatic Transmission 262 Engine Oil au zy 252 Manual Transmission 263 Power Steering 206 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 274 Fog lights 85 Fold and Tumble Rear Seat 80 Folding Rear Seat 82 Folding Windshield 136 Four Wheel Drive 194 Shift 22 kx ated 195 Four Wheel Drive Operation 194 Four Way Hazard Flasher 238 Front Axle Differentia 264 HD 65 asia Ok dd e h 224 Additives 225 Diesel io E 424 226 Filler Cap Gas Cap 226 GaSOliNe tudio da we sic 224
109. 91 Octane Fuel Selection Diesel Engines 50 Cetane or higher Less than 15 ppm Sulfur 274 Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission If Equipped MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Manual Transmission If Equipped MOPAR Manual Transmission Lubricant or equivalent meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 9224 Transfer Case MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed 4 product Axle Differential Front MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent Axle Differential Rear 226 RBI Model 44 MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent For trailer towing use MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 140 or equivalent Models equipped with Trac Lok require an additive Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent li censed 4 product 275 276 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engine The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for sched u
110. AB if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on each type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to pro vide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions de pending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck under rides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle de celeration over time vehicle speed and dam age by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have de ployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all crashes and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN positions If the key is in the LOCK position in the AC
111. AR HARD TOP IF EQUIPPED CAUTION The hard top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks spare tires building hunting or camping sup plies and or luggage etc Also it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmental rain snow etc Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame and bodyside or fully removed CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew e t is recommended that the top be free of water prior to panel removal Removing the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicles interior e The hard top assembly must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper instal lation can cause water to leak into the vehicles interior Careless handling and storage of the re movable roof panels may damage the Seals causing water to leak into the ve hicles interior The front panel s must be positioned prop erly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicles interior Front Panel s Removal NOTE Left panel must be removed before remov ing right panel 1 Fold down the sun visor and move it to the side 2 Turn the rear fasteners knobs located on the overhead speaker ba
112. ARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the Speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equip ment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death eep unmounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect ires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be in spected regularly for wear and corr
113. AUTO position 031407553 Headlight Switch 84 NOTE The engine must be running before the headlights will turn on in the Automatic mode Headlights with Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will urn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are urned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights with Wipers feature can be urned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle nformation Center EVIC if equipped Refer Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for fur her information Turn Signals ove the multifunction lever up or down and he arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 031407688 Turn Signal Operation NOTE e If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective A tone will chime if the turn signals left on for more than 1 mile 2 km Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right
114. Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes Never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down Driving Through Water Extreme care should be taken crossing any ype of water Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be attempted when necessary in a safe responsible manner You should only drive through areas which are designated and approved You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the environment You should know your vehicle s abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake If the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it Determine if it has ingested water first The key to any crossing is ow and slow Shift into first gear manual ransmission or DRIVE automatic transmis sion with the transfer case in the 4L Low position and proceed very slowly with a con stant slow speed 3 to 5 mph 5 to 8 km h maximum and light throttle Keep the vehicle moving do not try to accelerate through the crossing After crossing any water higher than he bottom of the axle differentials you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion 203 CAUTION e Water ingestion into the axles transmis sion transfer case engine or vehicle inte rior ca
115. Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Over ride under Automatic Transmission in the Starting and Operating section for instruc tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the PARK position for towing If you must use the accessories wipers de frosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position CAUTION Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to aflat bed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing e vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position not the LOCK position 245 Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle Four Wheel Drive Models The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly f flatbed equipment is not available and the ransfer case is operable the vehicle may be owed in the forward direction with ALL wheels on the ground IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission
116. C 303 ECUADOR ce o 22 304 304 AESTONIA T 304 SEINFANDEPPTCTTPLT 304 FRANCES o 304 GERMANY Gio aaa taa e atada 304 GRAND DUCHY OF LUXEMBOURG 304 e GREECE De CI C TED 304 ACUATEMACA rer ns 304 HONDURAS 305 AUNAR 305 IRELAND E TTE TE 305 s ITALY 305 CPC 305 OMA A 305 NETHERLANDS EE 305 sINEWZEALAND 305 ONO 305 PANAMA E IEEE 305 PARAGUAY 2 Eee siete 305 306 306 e PORTUGAL E o a 22 306 PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS 306 306 RUSSA 306 e SLOVENIA 306 SPAIN a ae 306 SWEDEN 306 SWITZERLAND 307 307 OWN I 5 307 AURA 307 E 307 S URUGUAY ees eter 307 eV ENEZUE CA E E E 307 301 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer distributors are vitally inter ested in your satisfaction with their products and services If a servicing problem or other difficulty should occur we recommend that you take the following steps Discuss the problem at the authorized dealer with the d
117. C position or not in the ignition the airbag system is not on and the airbags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes discon nected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag o Warning Light for four to eight sec t onds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC de tects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either mo mentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the airbag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the airbag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument
118. Front and Side Impact Sensors e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners and Seat Belt Buckle Switch Advanced Front Airbag Features The Advanced Front Airbag system has multi stage driver and front passenger airbags Thi system provides output appropriate to the se verity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors T The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deploy ment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions WARNING e No objects should be placed over or near the airbag on the instrument panel be cause any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate e Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional The protective cov ers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating e f your vehicle is equipped with Supplemen tal Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the SAB the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Continued WARNING Continued I
119. ICLE CENTERLINE um WHEEL CENTERLINE 813a949e Trailer Tow Hitch Attaching Points And Overhang Dimensions A N A B N A D maximum over 2 47 ft 754 mm hang E 3 39 ft 1032 mm F 0 16 ft 50 mm G 0 46 ft 140 mm 233 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Four Wheel Drive Models See Instructions e Automatic transmission in PARK Flat Tow NONE e Manual transmission in gear NOT in NEUTRAL e Transfer case in NEUTRAL N e Tow in forward direction Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED y Rear NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK Recreational Towing Four Wheel CAUTION CAUTION Continued Drive Models NOTE The transfer case must be shifted into N Neutral automatic transmission must be shifted into PARK and manual transmission must be placed in gear NOT in NEUTRAL for recreational towing 234 e Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing Tow only in the forward direction Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case Continued e Automatic transmissions must be placed in the PARK position for recreational towing e Manual transmissions must be placed in gear not i
120. L DOWN CHART Driving Conditions Load Turbocharger Temperature Idle Time In Minutes Before Shut Down Stop amp Go Empty Cool Less than 1 Stop amp Go Medium Warm 1 Highway Speeds Medium Warm 2 City Traffic Max GCWR Warm 3 Highway Speeds Max GCWR Warm 4 Uphill Grade Max GCWR Hot 5 STOP START SYSTEM DIESEL MODELS WITH MANUAL TRANSMISSION ONLY The Stop Start function is developed to save fuel and reduce emissions The system will stop the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions are met Pressing the clutch pedal will automatically re start the ve hicle Automatic Mode The Stop Start feature is enabled after every normal customer engine start It will remain in STOP START NOT READY until you drive for ward with a vehicle speed greater than 3 mph 5 km h At that time the system will go into STOP START READY and if all other conditions are met can go into an STOP START AUTO STOP ACTIVE mode To Activate The STOP START AUTO STOP ACTIVE Mode The Following Must Occur 1 The system must be in STOP START READY state A STOP START READY message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle In formation Center in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 183 2 Vehicle speed must be less 3 mph 5 km h 3 Shifter must be in the NEUTRAL position and the clutch pedal m
121. Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally in jured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disen gaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Continued WARNING Continued Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear Failure to do so may cause the ve hicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake sys tem serviced by an authorized dealer imme diately ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed o aid the driver in maintaining vehicle contro under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces 207 All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same Size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer WARNING Significant over or und
122. OTE Pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK button while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key9 Customer Key Program ming If you do not have a programmed RKE trans mitter contact your authorized dealer for de ails General Information Transmitter and receivers operate on a carrier requency of 433 92 MHz as required by EEC regulations These devices must be certified to conform to specific regulations in each indi vidual country Two sets of regulations are involved ETS European Telecommunication Standard 300 220 which most countries use and German BZT federal regulation 2257125 which is based on ETC 300 220 but has addi ional unique requirements Other defined re 17 quirements are noted in ANNEX VI of COMMIS SION DIRECTIVE 95 56 Operation is subject to the following two conditions e This device may not cause harmful interfer ence e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak battery
123. OUR DOOR MODELS IF EQUIPPED e Opening the Sunrider e Closing the Sunrider er OLEDING WINDSHIELD EET E 222000 Lowering the Windshield and Removing Side Bars e Raising the Windshield and Replacing Side Bars e REAR WINDOW FEATURES HARD TOP ONLY Rear Window Wiper Washer If Equipped Rear Window Defroster If Equipped MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield Adjusting Rearview Mirror 030407085 56 Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror Outside Rearview Mirror WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the pas senger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side mirror
124. RS The windshield wiper washer control lever 15 located on the right side of the steering column The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch located at the end of the lever For information on using the rear window wiper washer refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle 036407502 Windshield Wiper Washer Lever 87 Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third detent past the intermittent settings for high Speed wiper operation 031507503 Front Wiper Control 88 CAUTION In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is re started Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather con ditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable Ro ate the end of the lever to the first detent position for one of five intermittent settings The delay cycle can be set anywhere between 1 to 18 seconds 031507503 Front Wiper Control NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h dela
125. S GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Safety WARNING Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over heating and tire failure e Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause damage that results in tire failure e Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems You could lose control of your vehicle Over inflated or under inflated tires can af fect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire roling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and un comfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures Tire pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocke
126. Santo Domingo Dominican Republic Tel 809 562 7211 Fax 809 565 8774 303 ECUADOR Chrysler Jeep Automotriz del Ecuador Av Juan Tanca Marengo km 4 5 Guayaquil Ecuador Tel 593 4 225 7935 Fax 593 4 224 7787 EL SALVADOR Grupo Q del Salvador Blvd Los Pr ceres y Avenida No 1 Lomas de San Francisco San Salvador El Salvador Tel 503 22730988 Fax 503 278 5731 ESTONIA Silberauto AS J rvevana tee 11 11314 Tallinn Tel 06 266 098 Tel 06 266 050 Fax 06 266 066 304 FINLAND Chrysler FinlandOy Ristipellontie 5 00390 HELSINKI Tel 020 54771 Fax 020 5477 485 FRANCE Chrysler France Parc de Rocquencourt BP100 F 78153 Le Chesnay Cedex Tel 33 1 39 23 56 00 Fax 33 1 39 23 57 92 GERMANY Chrysler Deutschland GmbH Englische StraBe 30 D 10587 Berlin Telefon 49 0 30 2690 0 Telefax 49 0 30 2690 3999 GRAND DUCHY OF LUXEMBOURG TNT MAILFAST C O Chrysler Belgium Luxembourg BRU BRU 37850 Antwoord Nummer 193032 1930 Zaventem Belgium Tel 0800 6661 Fax 32 02 717 33 GREECE Chrysler Jeep Dodge Hellas 240 242 Kifisias Avenue 15231 Halandri Athens Greece Tel 30 210 6700800 Fax 30 210 6700820 GUATEMALA Grupo Q del Guatemala Edificio Grupo Q calle Mariscal Cruz 9 04 Zona 4 Ciudad de Guatemala Guatemala Tel 502 6685 9500 HONDURAS Grupo Q de Honduras Blvd Centro Am rica frente a Plaza Miraflores Tegucigalpa Honduras Tel B04
127. T 4 epos dd uet 23 Windshield Defroster 49 166 167 171 Windshield Folding 136 Windshield Washers 87 256 PUIG 256 Windshield Wiper Blades 256 Windshield Wipers 87 Wiper Rear a xx eee ee PAD Ree BS 140 319 320
128. TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA 48 WARNING e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death e ltis extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you uncon scious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly main tained engine exhaust system Whene
129. The correct wheel nut tight ness is 95 ft lbs 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 10 Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks 11 Secure the tire jack and tools in their proper locations 12 Remove blocks from wheels WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided CAUTION Do not attempt to raise vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 241 JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instruc tions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system volt age greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury
130. This system monitors the performance of the emis Sions engine and automatic transmission con rol systems When these systems are operat ing properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emissions well within current govern ment regulations f any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction ndicator Light MIL It will also store diagnos ic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission con trol system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed e f the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic sys em can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improperly installed or dam aged A gASCAP message will be displayed in the odometer Tighten the gas cap until clicking sound is heard This is an indication hat the gas cap is properly tightened Press he odometer reset button to turn the message off If the probl
131. Tip Start Automatic Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have fol owed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather procedures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then urn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as he engine warms up 181 Normal Starting Diesel Engine 1 The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine 2 Turn the ignition key to the ON position 3 Watch for the Wait To Start Light in the instrument cluster Refer to Instrument Cluster in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further review It will glow for two to ten seconds or more depending on engine temperature When the Wait To Start Light goes out the engine is ready to start 4 Tip Start Feature Automatic Transmission Only Do not press the accelerator Turn the ignition key to the START position and then release it The starter motor will continue to run and it will
132. VE The transmission will automatically shift from fourth gear to OVERDRIVE if the following conditions are present e the shift lever is in DRIVE e the engine coolant has reached normal op erating temperature e the vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the transmission has reached normal oper ating temperature If the vehicle is started in extremely cold temperatures the transmission may not shift into OVERDRIVE and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid tem perature has risen to a suitable level Refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch later in this section During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts depending on en gine and transmission temperature This feature improves the warm up time of the engine and transmission During cold temperature operation the transmission may not downshift from sec ond gear into first gear after the initial first to second gear upshift Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored for abnor mal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the Trans mission Limp Home Mode will be engaged In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the
133. Vanity Mirrors 57 Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED 57 Operation o EE o eT nonce 58 eiphone CalliEeatures 63 e Uconnect Phone Features 64 Advanced Phone Connectivity 67 e Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone o a 2225 68 e VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED 74 Voice Command System Operation 74 eiCommands 74 Voice Training 76 OL SEATS tae mete rete cate ne rei ticity CER Pec tt ere et ea 76 Front Seat Adjustment 77 Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped 77 e Front Seatback Recline 78 e Easy Entry Seats Two Door Models 78 n Slide Seats Two Door Models 78 Heated Seats If Equipped 79 e Head Restraints 2 26565 ia e RS 79 Fold and Tumble Rear Seat Two Door Models 80 Removing the Rear Seat Two Door Models 81 Replacing the Rear Seat Two Door Models 81 e 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat Four Door Models 82 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 83 E RC 83 e Multifunction Lever o oi os e 83 Headlights and Position Lights 83 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 84 Headli
134. WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have a collision Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set a Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When he vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Elec tronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary the Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can increase speed by pushing the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button res
135. adiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot 257 Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protec tion every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the en gine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant antifreeze Check the front of the A C con denser if equipped or radiator for any accu mulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the A C condenser if equipped or the back of the radiator core Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tight ness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating tempera ture but not running check the cooling sys tem pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant antifreeze will begin to drain from the coolant 258 recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOL ANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty and contains a considerable amount of
136. adio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears Illumination Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selection press and hold the SELECT button until Off 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears By Turn When this feature is selected the navigation system utilizes voice commands guiding through the drive route mile by mile turn by turn until the final destination is reached To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped When on is selected the HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in 163 Starting And Operating for system function and operating information To make your selec tion press and release the SELECT button until On or Off appears Display Fuel Saver If Equ
137. ag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufac turer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Continued WARNING Continued e A rearward facing infant restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards The manu facturer also recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it 39 All seating positions except for driver have a automatic locking retractor The seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
138. aged scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condi tion may be lessened or eliminated by relocat ing the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio perfor mance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recom mended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather Manual Heating and Air Conditioning The Manual Temperature Controls consist of series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs Blower Control Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the 045607539 right from the OFF position There seven blower speeds 165 Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the tempera ture of the air inside the passenger ment Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates 045607540 Cooler temperatures while rotating right
139. ains on HOT H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the off can help remove this heat You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supple ment to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side ofthe vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or chang ing the wheel Being under a jacked up vehicle is danger ous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack e Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get und
140. air Link Uconnect Phone to a Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone refer to Introduction section to learn about the phone type To complete the pairing process you will need to reference your mobile phone owner s manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts e You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process e For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name e You will then be asked to give your mobi phone a priority level between 1 and 7 wi 1 being the highest priority You can pair u to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only on mobile phone can be in use connected your Uconnect System The priority allow the Uconnect Phone to know which mobi phone to use if multiple
141. aise the top engaging the Sunrider latches another per son may be needed to help with this operation 035907427 107 2 Engage header latches 3 Install rear corner panels 4 Install side and back windows 81925914 108 Lowering The Soft Top 035907422 i 1 Header Bow 6 Quarter Window 2 2 Bow 7 Check Strap 3 3 Bow 8 Front Retainer Quarter Window 4 Sail Panel 9 Bottom Retainer Quarter Window 5 Body Side Retainer 109 1 Zipper Start 2 Zipper Finish 3 Swing Gate Bar 4 Swing Gate Brackets 5 Sail Panels 110 Clean side and rear windows before removal to assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft top If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust etc clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush Cleaning products are available through your authorized dealer 1 If your vehicle has half doors remove each half door window by opening the door and lifting the half door window out NOTE Stow the half door windows carefully out side of the vehicle never inside to avoid scratches 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 3 Release the header latches and leave the hooks in the loops on the windshield 4 Open the swing gate 5 Before unzipping the rear window release the first 3 in 7 6 cm of both sail panels from the channel Remove the swing gate b
142. al or the shift lever Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position STEERING WHEEL LOCK IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering wheel lock This lock prevents steering the vehicle without the ignition key If the steer ing wheel is moved approximately a half turn in either direction and the key is not in the igni tion the steering wheel will lock To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel With the engine running rotate the steering wheel one half revolution from the straight ahead position turn off the engine and remove the key Rotate the steering wheel slightly in both directions until the lock engages To Release the Steering Wheel Lock Insert the key in the ignition and turn the wheel slightly to the left or right to disengage the lock If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to disengage it If you turned the wheel to the left to engage t
143. all the soft top If the soft top is on the vehicle proceed to step 5 a If the pivot brackets have been removed unzip the sport bar covers and attach the pivot brackets to the sports bar with the four Screws that were removed using a 0 Torx head driver Re cover and re zip the sport bar covers 035605925 b Lay the soft top into the rear of the vehicle with the bows pointing forward and the curved portion of the bows facing upward c Reattach the knuckles onto the metal pivot brackets 96 NOTE To aid in reattaching the knuckles you may carefully tap on the knuckles using a rubber mallet d Screw the pivot screws back into place using a 30 Torx head driver Secure them until they are snug being careful not to cross thread the screws or overtighten CAUTION Do not overtighten the screws You can strip the screws if they are overtightened 5 Remove the swing gate bar black metal bar or bottom of rear window and set aside NOTE Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top 6 Unsnap and remove the black boot cover This cover should be discarded It was in tended as a protective cover for shipping only A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual top wrap 7 Put up the soft top Refer to Soft Top Putting Up the Soft Top in this section FREEDOM THREE PIECE MODUL
144. ame 81925e7d 3 Grasp the front side bow behind the header and lift the top N y 036007403 4 Fold back the front section of the top and gently rest the header on top of the rear portion of the deck 135 5 Fold the top so that the material forms a W as shown Enter the vehicle and move the material into two folds 6 Secure the top by using the two provided straps Each strap will wrap around the side bow and Velcro to itself use one strap on each side of the vehicle 136 Closing the Sunrider Perform the above steps in the opposite order NOTE Failure to fold the fabric rearward will allow the material to sag and may block the rear view mirror FOLDING WINDSHIELD The fold down windshield and removable side bars on your vehicle are structural elements that can provide some protection in some ac cidents The windshield also provides some protection against weather road debris and intrusion of small branches and other objects Do not drive your vehicle on road with the windshield down and the side bars removed as you lose the protection these structural ele ments can provide If required for certain off road uses the side bars can be removed and the windshield folded down However the protection afforded by these features is then lost If you remove the side bars and fold down the windshield drive slowly and cautiously It is recommended that the speed of the vehicle b
145. ance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional wo wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu vers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS Side Step Removal If Equipped NOTE Prior to off road usage the side steps should be removed to prevent damage 1 Remove the two nuts from the bodyside 2 Remove one bolt from the underside of the vehicle 3 Remove the side step assembly The Basics Of Off Road Driving You will encounter many types of terrain driving off road You should be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding There are many ypes of surface conditions hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow and ice Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle s steering handling and traction Con rolling your vehicle is one of the keys to suc cessful off road driving so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture Avoid sudden accelerations urns or braking In most cases there are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights Therefore you will need to use your own good judgment on what is sa
146. and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubri cated The external lock cylinders should be lubri cated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality 255 lubricant such as Lock Oylinder Lu bricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non abrasive cleaner This will remove accumulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasolin
147. anel s Removal in this section 2 Open both doors 3 Remove the two Torx head screws that secure the hard top at the B pillar near the top of the door using a 40 Torx head driver Four Door Only 4 Remove the six Torx head screws that secure the hard top to the vehicle along the interior bodyside using a 40 Torx head driver 5 Open the swing gate all the way to ensure clearance of the rear window glass Lift the rear window glass 81947 57 6 Locate the wire harness on the left rear inside corner of the vehicle m 035734179 7 Release the red locking tab by pulling out ward 8 To remove the wiring harness press the tab and pull to disconnect I 035734181 9 To remove the washer hose pinch the grips on hose connector and pull 035734182 10 Close the swing gate 11 Remove the hard top from the vehicle Place the hard top on a soft surface to prevent damage CAUTION The removal of the Freedom Top requires four adults located on each corner Failure to fol low this caution could damage the Freedom Top 101 Rear Hard Top Installation NOTE If the door frames are installed from soft top usage they must be removed prior to instal lation of the hard top 1 Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if necessary 2 Install the hard top using the same steps for removal in reverse order Make sure that t
148. ar by pulling it straight rearward out of the swing gate brackets 81b342a7 e Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower corner of the window Pull the zip per up across the top and down to the left lower corner Zipper pulls will stay on the rear window Pull down on the rear window to disengage it from the zipper on the top cover 81925a32 111 6 Remove the rear window retainer from the swing gate bracket on both the left and right sides 7 Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratch ing 8 Undo the Velcro that runs along the top and rear edge of the side window 9 Beginning from the rear lower corner com pletely unzip the window 112 10 Once unzipped remove the side window retainers from the door channel and side channel Repeat this step on the opposite side 11 Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle NOTE When releasing the sail panel retainers it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow 12 As you begin to lower the top fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft top 15 Make sure the plastic sleeves slid rearward over the Sunrider link Sunrider Models only 13 The swing gate brackets do not need to be 14 Completely release the latches from the removed unless the hard top is being installed loops on the windshield frame If your vehicle To remove the swing ga
149. ason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating and Towing a Dis abled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergen cies for further information DRIVE The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all nor mal operating conditions 192 Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows you to move the shift lever left or right when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position allowing the selection of the desired top gear For example if the driver shifts the transmission into third gear the transmission will never shift above third gear but can shift down to second gear or first gear when needed WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid Screen Display 1 2 3 4 D Actual Gear s 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 Allowed NOTE To select the proper gear position for maxi mum deceleration engine braking move the shift lever to the left D and hold it there The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down Overdrive Operation The overdrive automatic transmission contains an electronically controlled fifth gear OVER DRI
150. ates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the information in his section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passen gers as safe as possible WARNING In an accident you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buck led up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause an accident that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the ve hicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejec tion and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions How ever in an accident the belt will lock and r
151. ator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing engine coolant anti freeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze needed to maintain the proper level it shoul be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfi LOG Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may ob serve vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is normally a re sult of moisture from rain snow or high 260 humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant bottle e Check the engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recov ery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be pro tected against freezing e f frequent engine coolant antifreeze addi tions are required or if the level in the recovery bottle does not drop when
152. aust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such ma terials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunc ioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst over heating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off he engine and allow it to cool Service includ ing a tune up to manufacturer s specifications should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning op erating conditions e Do not allow the vehicle to run out of fuel NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions con trol systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the r
153. aving the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to the authorized dealer Customer Key Programming See your authorized dealer if you require re placement or additional keys for your vehicle General Information The Sentry Key operates on a carrier fre quency of 433 92 MHz The Sentry Key Immo bilizer system will be used in the following European countries which apply Directive 1999 5 EC Austria Belgium Czech Republic Denmark Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Luxembourg Nether lands Norway Poland Portugal Romania Russian Federation Slovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Yugoslavia and United Kingdom Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interfer ence e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors hood swing gate and ignition for unau thorized operation If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will sound the horn intermit tently flash the headlights and taillights and flash the Vehicle Security Light in the cluster Rearming Of The System If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will signal with the siren for 30 seconds If the triggering device is not deactivated the siren wi
154. ay turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message gASCAP After fuel has been added the vehicle diagnos tic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improperly installed or dam aged If the system detects a malfunction the gASCAP message will display in the odom eter display Tighten the gas cap until a click ing sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will ap pear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Re solving the problem will turn the MIL light off TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the re quirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the
155. belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous Your body could strike the in Side surfaces of the vehicle in an accident increasing head and neck injury A belt NOTE The Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the driver s seat belt is buckled Removing Slack from Belt WARNING Continued e A twisted belt cannot do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you cannot straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your autho WARNING e lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in an accident The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug Continued rized dealer immedi ately and have it fixed neck The retractor wi he belt 6 To release the belt he buckle The belt wi its stowed position If n 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so hat it is comfortable and not resting on your withdraw any slack in push the red button on automatically retract to ecessary slide the latch plate down the webbi retract fully ng to allow the belt to 27 WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or l
156. ber with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030607720 Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Y at a time Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Enter Number Phonebook New Entry Added 81c6bf80 71 Voice Tree Setup Setup Service Confirmation will Prompts temporarily on off Say 4 digit override pin code Phones phone Select phone to be deleted List Phones priorities Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing System System Lists All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605582 Voice Commands Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s zero download pager beeper one Dutch Nederlands pair a phone two edit phone pairing pairing three emergency phonebook phonebook four English previous five delete all erase all redial Six Espanol select phone select seven Francais send eight German Deutsch set up phone settings or nine help phone set up asterisk star home transfer call plus
157. brakes Drain the fuel filter water separator unit Replace the fuel filter water separator unit Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary Inspect the brake linings a a a a a a a a a a Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 100 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 112 500 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Drain the fuel filter water separator unit Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid 1 Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary J Inspect the brake linings Replace the engine accessory drive belt Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 296 125 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a a a a a a a a a a Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace engine air cleaner filter Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Drain the fuel filter water separator unit Replace the fuel filter water separator unit Replace the engine ti
158. c Set blower knob to any User selectable Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic desired airflow level other to any speed be overridden than Auto Set mode for 10 minutes knob to Auto Set temperature at a timc knobs for comfort Mode Preferred Automatic Set mode knob to any desired Automatic User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable air delivery point other than to any air outside or on or off Auto Set blower knob to delivery point recirculated Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Blower and Mode Set blower knob to any User selectable User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable Preferred Automatic desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort to any speed to any air delivery point outside or recirculated A C on or off 81a12736 The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions Panel 7 Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi Level 7 Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE
159. c addi ive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufac urer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his her gasoline contains MMT Materials Added to Fuel Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating gasolines that contain detergents corrosion and stability additives are recommended Using gasolines that have hese additives will help improve fuel economy reduce emissions and maintain vehicle perfor mance ndiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided Many of these ma erials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredi ents These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to pre vent carbon monoxide poisoning Continued WARNING Continued Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked v
160. cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the con verter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improp erly Refer to Jump Starting in What to Do In Emergencies for further information Without Tip Start Manual Transmission Only f the engine fails to start after you have fol owed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather procedures it may be flooded Push he accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accel erator pedal held to the floor repeat the Nor mal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather pro cedures With
161. category approved for use in the mass group IL Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems CRS given in the attached list These ISOFIX CRS are those of the specific vehicle restricted or semi universal categories X ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and or this size class 43 ISOFIX Child Seat Four Door Models cus Fixture Seating Position ass a ass Front Rear Rear THp Pas Out Cen senger board ter 0 Up E ISOR1 X IUF X to 10 kg 1 X X X E ISO R1 X IUF X 0 Up D ISO R2 X X X toi3kg ISO R3 X X X 1 X X X D ISO R2 X X X C ISO R3 X X X s RSS 18 kg d U A ISO F3 X IUF X 1 X X X 1 15 1 X X X to 25 kg IIl 22 1 X X X to 36 kg 1 For the child restraint systems CRS which do not carry the ISO XX size class iden ification A to G for the applicable mass group the manufacturer will indicate the ve 44 hicle specific ISOFIX child restraint system s recommended for each position Key of letters used in the table above IUF Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint Systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group IL Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems CRS given in the attached list These ISOFIX 5 are those of the specific vehicle restricted or semi universal categories
162. cations may be required before the zipper comes free 268 6 Never paste stickers gummed labels or any tape to the windows Adhesives are hard to remove and may damage the windows FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module The Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center contains cartridge fuses mini fuses and relays A label that identifies each component is printed on the inside of the cover Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse Fuse J1 J2 30 Amp Transfer Case Pink Module J3 J4 25 Amp Driver Door Natural Node J5 25 Amp Passenger Door Natural Node J6 40 Amp Anti Lock Brake Green System ABS Pump Stability Control System J7 30 Amp Anti Lock Brake Pink System ABS Valve Stability Control System J8 J9 40 Amp PZEV Sec Green Motor Flex Fuel J10 30 Amp Headlamp Wash Pink Relay Manifold Tuning Valve Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse J11 30 Amp Sway Bar M1 15 Amp Center High M9 20 Amp Rear Heated Pink Blue Mounted Stop Yellow Seat If J13 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw Light CHMSL Equipped Yellow IOD Main Swit
163. ceed with caution Allow engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNING Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be seriously injured Driving Across An Incline f at all possible avoid driving across an in cline If it is necessary know your vehicle s abilities Driving across an incline places more weight on the downhill wheels which increases he possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover ake sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable soils If possible transverse the incline at an angle heading slightly up or down WARNING Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brake Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing engine brak ing to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires o lock WARNING If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle which may result in severe injury
164. ch Stop M10 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw J14 40 Amp Rear Defroster Lamp Feed Yellow Vehicle Enter Green M2 20 Amp Relay Trailer tainment System J15 30 Amp Front Blower Yellow Lighting Sto Satellite Digital Pink plamp Audio Receiver J17 40 Amp Starter Solenoid M3 20 Amp Fri Rear Axle SDARS DVD Green Yellow Locker Relay Hands Free J18 20 Amp Powertrain Con M4 Module RADIO Blue trol Module M5 25 Amp Power Inverter Antenna Univer PCM Trans Natural If Equipped sal Garage Door Range M6 20 Amp Power Outlet 2 Vanity J19 60 Amp Radiator Fan Yellow 1 Rain Sensor amp Yellow M7 20 Amp Power Outlet 2 MM J20 30 Amp Front Wiper Yellow BATT ACC SE 3 raw Climate Pink LO HI LECT Control System Underhood Lamp 421 20 Front Rear M8 20 Amp Front Heated M12 30 Amp Ampli er Blue Washer Yellow Seat 2 22 Spare 269 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M13 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw M16 10 Amp Airbag Module M25 20 Amp Fuel Pump Die Yellow Cabin Com Red Yellow sel Lift Pump partment Node M17 15 Amp Left Tail License Export Only Wireless Control Blue Park Lamp M26 Module SIREN M18 15 Amp Right Tail Park M27 10 Amp Ignition Switch Multifunction B
165. ch is set at Rear Window Defroster If Equipped The rear window defroster button is located on the bottom right side of the blower control knob Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster An indica tor in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window de froster automatically turns off after approxi mately 10 minutes For an additional five min utes of operation press the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the win dow Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating ele ments Labels can be peeled off after soak ing with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES e INSTRUMENT CLUSTER GASOLINE e INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DIESEL e INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER Control Buttons a e o 2 2 2 o Trip Conditions Co
166. channel be ginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle Finish by closing the zipper com pletely and attaching the Velcro along the top and rear of the window Repeat this step for the opposite side 13 Locate the black swing gate bar Slide the swing gate bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear window The spongy part of the seal should be down and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate when closed 81b34ac6 117 14 Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends at the lower left corner of the rear window opening Ensure that the zippers are properly started and aligned before zipping to prevent damage 118 15 Run the zipper fully around to the right side of the window 16 Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the swing gate brackets 17 Insert the rear window retainer into the swing gate bracket on both the left and right sides 18 Apply downward pressure on the top cor ner of the rear soft top bow 3 bow then complete attaching the sail panel retainers into the body side channel 19 Close the header latches and return the sun visors to their secured position SOFT TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS Please visit the owner s section of Jeep com for instructional videos CAUTION The soft top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks spare tires building hunting or camping suppl
167. ck of the seat For the outboard seating positions route the tether under the head rest and attach the hook to the tether anchor lo cated on the back of the seat WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor posi tions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Vehicles With Rear Web Buckles That May Need To Be Twisted e n the rear seat you may have trouble tight ening the lap shoulder belt on the child re straint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out e f the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passen ger during panic braking or in an accident Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts
168. connect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phone book is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recommended For ex ample say Robert Smith or Robert in stead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designa tion e g Home Work Mobile or Other This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if de sired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads mobile phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook transfer from Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically down loads names text names and number entries from the mob
169. cted brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s to provide enhanced accel eration and stability A feature of the TCS sys tem functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in either the Partial Off or Full Off modes Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section for further information Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS comple ments the anti lock brake system ABS Apply ing the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the System you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The Brake Assist System BAS cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the tractio
170. d a means for adjusting the tension of the strap n general you will first loosen the adjusters on he lower and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the ower and tether anchorages The tether strap should be routed under the center of the head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on he rear of the seatback Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat ot all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instructions that come with the child restraint system NOTE If your child restraint seat is not ISOFIX compatible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor posi tion directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Universal Child Seat Two Door Models Seating Position Front Mass Group passen Rear ger Outboard 0 Uptotokg X U 0 Up to 13 kg X U 1 9 to 18 kg X U Il 15 to 25 kg X U 22 to 36 kg X U 41 Universal Child Seat Four Door Models Seating Position Mass Group Be Rear ger board Center 0 Up to 10 kg X U U 0 Up to X U U 13 kg 9 to 18 kg X U U Il 15 to 25 kg X U U Ill 22 to 36 kg X
171. d ao WAR Rens e m tiras d Off Pavement Driving Off Road 198 a N i Fluid 263 Off Road Driving QNEM 198 ne bibe d Des Lubricant Selection 2 263 Change Indicator 152 160 290 Ti torina TPMS 4 Shift Speeds 186 Change Indicator Reset 152 160 290 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 150 aster Cylinder Brakes 2222 22 261 A des 15825 Matand RC gt isep pipe drei din ethanol Fuel 224 Change Interval 160 Voltage 46 ini Trip Computer 154 160 Diesel 253 Warning Instrument Cluster 56 e ee 259 Description 146 Electric Powered 56 Eller A 254 98 Electric Remote Child Proteetion 22 Outside 56 aterials Added to 254 Rearview 56 Pressure Warning Light 146 Power act 21 Vanity ERE 57 Recommendation 252 253 273 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Viscosity 253 273 lid Modular 97 Oi Pressure Light 146 316 Onboard Diagnostic System 251 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 6 Outside Rearview Mirrors 56 Overdrive 192 Overdrive OFF Switch 192
172. d calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges under ground cables railroad tracks etc 161 Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Start the engine Leave the shift lever in PARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming Menus 2 Press the MENU button until the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu displays in the EVIC 3 Press the DOWN button until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will display in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic ob jects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance 162 should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel this is where the compass sensor is located Compass Variance Map 1
173. d console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period e Performance is maximized under low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions Even though the system is designed for users speaking in European English Dutch French German Italian or Spanish accents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated sys tem such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sound ing names in the Uconnect Phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Local name recognition rate is opti mized when the entries are not similar e Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred e You can say letter for 0 zero e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e In a convertible vehicle system perfor
174. de in 4L range Two wheel drive ve hicles and four wheel drive vehicles in 2H range have two operating modes 4H Range 4WD Models or 2WD Models On This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4H and 2WD vehicles Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch ESC OFF Switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC has been disabled and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESC function nor mally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel condi tions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC OFF switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driv ing with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion WARNING With the ESC switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC and ERM are unavailable In an emergency evasive maneu ver the ESC and ERM systems will not en gage to assist in maintaining stability The F
175. driv ing style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to 160 the ON position To turn off the message tem porarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance per form the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi tion NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indica tor system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy Distance To Empty e Elapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following information e Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for wo seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from he last fuel average reading before the reset e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be raveled with the fuel remaining in
176. during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure buildup or your tire pres sure will be too low Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintain ing correct tire inflation pressure is very impor tant Increased tire pressure and reduced ve hicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle operation Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Always use radial tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewal lexing Consult your authorized dealer for ra dial tire repairs Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice condi ions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h W
177. e 230 Trailer Weight 230 Transfer Case 263 Four Wheel Drive Operation 194 aintenanee s i e aaa RE 263 Transmission 191 fae gee ge a a 188 191 Maintenance 262 263 Manual ii 185 Range Indicator 149 S 187 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 18 Transporting Pets 47 Tread Wear Indicators 219 Trip Computer 154 Odometer 150 Trip Odometer Reset Button 149 Turn Signals 84 146 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 57 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 28 Upholstery Care 265 Vanity Mirrors 57 Variance Compass 162 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 8 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Storage 172 271 Viscosity Engine Oil 253 Voice Recognition System VR 74 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 146 Warnings and Cautions 8 Washers Windshield 256 Waxing and Polishing 264 Wheel and Wheel Tim 265 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 265 Wheel Mounting 241 Wind 24 Window Fogging 173 Windows 23 POW
178. e etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies de pending on geographical area and fre quency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks wa ter lines or wet spots If any condition is present please proceed to clean wiper 256 blades with humid cloth removing any de bris that may be affecting its function Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer if equipped is shared The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid res ervoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercial windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or work ing around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle is a properly main tained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
179. e next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previ ous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thin ner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a par ticular disc it may be dam
180. e Bars earlier in this section e Reattach the sport bar Velcro covering 3 Attach the front of the side bar to the wind shield frame Install the top two hex bolts 13 mm first then the lower side hex bolt 13 mm The lower side bolt will not align until the top two bolts are installed 819292b7 4 Tighten all side bar attachment bolts 5 Install the lower windshield plates with the six black round headed Torx head screws using a 40 Torx head driver on each side of the base of the windshield 6 Reinstall the wiper arms 139 REAR WINDOW FEATURES HARD TOP ONLY Rear Window Wiper Washer If Equipped A rotary switch on the center portion of the control lever located on the right side of the steering column controls the operation of the rear wiper washer function 031507505 Rear Wiper Washer Control Rotate the switch upward to the first detent position for rear wiper operation 140 Rotate the switch upward past the first detent to activate the rear washer The washer pump and the wiper will con tinue to operate as long as the switch is held Upon release the wiper will cycle two to three times before returning to the set position If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned to the LOCK position the wiper will automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the wiper will resume function at whichever position the swit
181. e Shift Positions e Shifting Procedure 2 2 2 2 TRAC LOK REAR AXLE IF EQUIPPED AXLE LOCK TRU LOK RUBICON MODELS ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT IF EQUIPPED ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS EE OFEEROADIDRIVINGMIPS me 3 22222222222 Side Step Removal If Equipped The Basics Of Off Road Driving When To Use 4L Low Range e Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation e Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 199 Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High Points 200 eiHillicmbingg Ir TT E 202 e Driving Through Water 203 After Driving Off Road 205 e POWER STEERING o area ensue 205 Power Steering Fluid Check 206 PARKING BRAKE ys crave ase near ere en euch a hors 206 e ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM 207 e ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 208 Traction Control System TCS 209 Brake Assist System BAS 209 eiHilliStar Assist LISA 209 e Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 211 Electronic Stability Control ESC 212 e ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC OFF indicator tion e 215 e Trailer Sway Control TSC 215 Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped 216 TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION
182. e Technol or equivalent Engine Oil Gasoline Non ACEA Catego Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 engine oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard ries MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade SAE 5W 30 engine oil approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil is not available Engine Oil Gasoline ACEA Categories For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils use engine oils meet ing the requirements of ACEA C3 and approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 SAE 5W 30 engine oil approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil is not available Engine Oil Diesel without Particulate Filter Use SAE OW 40 diesel engine oils confirming to API Quality 4 or CJ 4 For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils use engine oils meeting the requirements of ACEA C3 and approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 Engine Oil Diesel with Particulate Filter Use SAE 5W 30 diesel engine oils conforming to API Quality 4 or CJ 4 For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils use engine oils meeting the requirements of ACEA C3 LOW ASH and approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 Spark Plugs 3 8L Engine RE14PLP5 Gap 0 050 in 1 27 mm Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Fuel Selection Gasoline Engines
183. e compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance ree battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accesso ries contain lead and lead compounds Al ways wash hands after handling the battery CAUTION It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and are identified on the battery case Also if a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air condi ioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of he condenser fins and a performance
184. e limited to 10 mph 16 km h with low range operation preferred if you are driving off road with the windshield folded down Raise the windshield and reinstall the side bars as soon as the task that required their removal is completed and before you return to on road driving Both you and your passenger should wear seat belts at all times on road and off road regardless of whether the windshield is raised or folded down Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the doors If you choose to remove the doors see your authorized dealer for a replacement cowl mounted outside mirror Federal law requires outside mirrors on vehicles for on road use WARNING Carefully follow these warnings to help protect against personal injury Do not drive your vehicle on road with the windshield down e Do not drive your vehicle unless the wind shield is securely fastened either up or down e Eye protection such as goggles should be worn at all times when the windshield is down Be sure that you carefully follow the instruc tions for raising the windshield Make sure that the folding windshield windshield wip ers side bars and all associated hardware and fasteners are correctly and tightly as sembled before driving your vehicle Fail ure to follow these instructions may prevent your vehicle from providing you and your passengers protection in some accidents Continued WARNING Continued e f you
185. e met 1 The Automatic Door Locks feature is en abled The transmission is in gear All doors are closed The throttle is pressed The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 4 km h The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows Ub rp 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 22 3 Press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small chil dren riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock sys tem To engage or disengage the Child Protection Door Lock system 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door Child Protection Door Lock Function WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a colli Sion Remember that th
186. e rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged NOTE For emergency exit with the system en gaged move the rocker lever rearward un locked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle WINDOWS Power Windows If Equipped The power window switches are located on the instrument panel below the radio Press the switch downward to open the window and upward to close the window Power Window Switches The top left switch controls the left front window and the top right switch controls the right front window NOTE The switches will continue to function for up to two minutes after the ignition key has been removed or until a front door is opened Four Door Models The lower left switch controls the left rear pas senger window and the lower right switch controls the right rear passenger window Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switches have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto Down operation pull up on the Switch briefly To partially open the window press halfway to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop Window Lockou
187. e the front of the rear door 4 Loosely install the rear knob long knob to hold the door rail in position 5 Carefully set the front of the front door frame in the rubber seal at the top of the windshield 81925281 6 Clip the front of the door rail over the side bar making sure that the material for the side bar cover is not pinched by the door frame 7 Position the rear of the front door frame to lay on top of the front of the rear door frame Ensure the seals are installed correctly to avoid water leaks w 8 Loosely install both knobs beginning with the front knob long knob Then install the middle knob short knob through the front and rear door frames and screw into the top of the B pillar 9 Tighten the front knob then the rear most knob and then the middle knob Repeat this procedure for the other side SOFT TOP TWO DOOR MODELS Please visit the owners section of Jeep com for instructional videos 1924 8 CAUTION The soft top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks spare tires building hunting or camping supplies and or luggage etc Also it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmental rain snow etc If the temperature is below 72 F 24 C and or he top has been folded down for a period of ime the top will appear to have shrunk wh
188. e the risk of injury in collisions Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an accident These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occu pant early in an accident Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu pant Restraint Controller ORC Like the air bags the pretensioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed airbag must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature driver to fasten their s active whenever the ign unbelted the Seat Belt on and remain on unti fastened BeltAlert trig of vehicle speed over reminder sequence last the driver seatbelt is intended to remind the eatbelt This feature is ition is on If the driver is Reminder Light will turn the driver seatbelt is gers within 60 seconds 5 mph 8 km h The s for 96 seconds or until astened After the se quence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the driver seat belt is fastened The driver shou
189. e toward you with your rearward hand to remove the frame from the vehicle 4 Screw the knobs back into the door frame and fold for storage Store in a secure location 81924c19 WARNING Never store the door frames in your vehicle In an event of an accident a loose door frame many cause personal injury If removed al ways store the door frames outside of the vehicle Door Frame Installation Two Door Models 1 Unfold door frame and unscrew thumb SCrews 2 Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body side behind the door opening 3 After the door frame pin has been set into the body side hole carefully set the front of the door frame into the rubber seal at the top of the windshield 4 Starting with the front of the door frame clip it over the metal side bar and then clip the rear making sure that the material for the side bar covers is not pinched by the door frame 103 5 Starting with the front knob screw in and tighten both knobs Repeat on the other side Door Frame Installation Four Door Models 1 Install the rear door frame first 2 Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body side just behind the rear door open ing 104 3 Position the top of the door frame against the metal sport bar and press onto the side bar making sure not to pinch the material of the Sports bar covers and to ensure it is properly positioned on the seal abov
190. ead the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient refer encing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Operating this vehicle at excessive speeds or while intoxicated may result in loss of control collision with other vehicles or objects going off the road or overturning any of which may lead to serious injury or death Also failure to use seat belts subjects the driver and passen gers to a greater risk of injury or death To keep your vehicle running at its best have your vehicle serviced at recommended inter vals by an authorized dealer or distributor who has the qualified personnel special tools and equipment to perform all service The manufacturer and its distributors are vitally interested in your complete satisfaction with this vehicle If you encounter a service or warranty problem which is not resolved to your satisfaction discuss the matter with your autho rized dealer or distributors management Your authorized dealer or distributor will be happy to assist you with any questions about your vehicle ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll over rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a
191. ead this entire manual you may miss impor tant information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also ap pears on the right side frame rail and the Automobile Information Disclosure Label af fixed to a window on your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE s ANWORDIABOUIRYOURIKEYSEE T 13 eilgnitioniKegHemoval rcr C 13 Key In Ignition Reminder 13 STEERING WHEEL LOCK IF EQUIPPED 13 To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel 13 e To Release the Steering Wheel Lock 13 Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System 14 14 eeplacemeniKey s TT 14 Customer Key Programming 15 Generallinformation 15 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED 15 Rearming Of The System
192. ealer principal or the service man ager Management personnel at the authorized dealer are in the best position to resolve the problem quickly When you contact the distributor please provide all of the following information e Your name address and phone number Vehicle Identification Number this 17 digit number is found on an etched plate or label located on the left front corner of the instru ment panel visible through the windshield It is also available from your vehicle registra tion or title Selling and servicing authorized dealer Vehicle s delivery date and current odometer distance 302 e Service history of your vehicle An accurate description of the problem and the conditions under which it occurs ARGENTINA Chrysler Argentina S A Boulevard Azucena Villaflor 435 C1107CII Buenos Aires Argentina Tel 54 11 4891 7900 Fax 54 11 4891 7901 AUSTRALIA Chrysler Chrysler Australia Pty Ltd ACN 124 956 505 PO Box 4145 Dandenong South Vic 3175 Ph 03 9238 2600 AUSTRIA Chrysler Austria Gesellschaft m b H Felmayergasse 2 A 1210 Wien Tel 43 1 5465 15131 Fax 43 1 5465 15132 BALANCE OF THE CARIBBEAN Interamericana Trading Company Warrens St Michael Barbados West Indies Tel 246 417 8000 Fax 246 425 2888 BELGIUM Chrysler Belgium Luxembourg NV Tollaan 68 B 1200 Brussel Tel 0800 94634 free phone number Fax 32 0 2 717 3301 BOLIVIA Ovand
193. eals causing water to leak into the vehicle s interior Quick Steps for Lowering the Soft Top Continued 3 Fold header rearward pulling the fabric to 1 Remove the side and back windows the rear 120 Quick Steps for Raising the Soft Top 1 Open the swing gate and raise the top engaging the Sunrider latches another per son may be needed to help with this operation 036007403 5 Open the swing gate and lower the top 81926dc3 4 Release Sunrider latch both sides NOTE Ensure the fabric does not overhang the sides of the vehicle 121 2 Install rear corner panels 5 Install the side and back windows 4 Engage the header latches 3 Rotate the header forward 122 Folding Down The Soft 1 Header Bow 6 Body Side Retainer 7 Quarter Window 2 2 Bow 3 3 Bow 8 Check Strap 4 4 Bow 9 Front Retainer Quarter Window 5 Sail Panel 10 Bottom Retainer Quarter Window 123 1 Zipper Start 2 Zipper Finish 3 Swing Gate Bar 4 Swing Gate Brackets 5 Sail Panels 124 Clean side and rear windows before removal to assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft top If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust etc clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush Cleaning products are available through your authorized deal
194. eck the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent add as required Once a Month Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage Inspect the battery clean and tighten the terminals as required Check the fluid levels of engine coolant antifreeze deaeration bottle brake master cylinder and transmission and add as needed Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change Change the engine oil filter Inspect the exhaust system Inspect brake hoses Check the engine coolant antifreeze level hoses and clamps Inspect engine accessory drive belts Re place as necessary Inspect for the presence of water in the fuel filter water separator unit Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 12 500 miles 20 000 km or 12 months whichever comes first 12 500 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Q Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the eng
195. ect cold tire inflation pressure The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed see the para graph on tread wear indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service de scription and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely 219 affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you refer to your original equipment or contact an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability WARNING Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimen sions and performance characteristics re sulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steer ing and suspension components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Continued 220 WARNING Continued Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result
196. educe the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e t is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In an acci dent people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Continued 25 WARNING Continued e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is danger ous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of an accident the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in an accident much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size 26 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat next to your arm in the rear
197. eel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles 211 Anytime the ESC system is in the Full mode ERM is disabled Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC for a complete expla nation of the available ESC modes WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road conditions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles The capa bilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESC corrects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of 212 he appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting he over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle main ain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine he vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the
198. ehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the ve hicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short pe riod adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust System inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions re paired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open e Keep the swing gate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle 225 FUEL REQUIREMENTS DIESEL ENGINES Use Premium Quality Diesel fuels with a Cetane rating of 50 or higher and meeting the EN590 standard are highly recommended See your authorized dealer for further information re garding fuels available in your area ADDING FUEL Locking Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The locking gas cap is located on the driver s side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle 81 8 3 Fuel Filler Cap 226 1 Turn off engine 2 Insert the ignition key into the fuel cap and turn the key one quarter turn to the right then rotate the fuel cap to the left to remove 3 Rotate the ignition key back to the left to remove 4 To replace the cap insert it into the filler neck and tighten to the right until at least three
199. el Shift Lever Override Access Cover 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 5 Using the screwdriver or similar tool reach into the opening and press and hold the shift lever override 6 Move the shift lever into NEUTRAL 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEU TRAL 8 Reinstall the shift lever override access cover TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service If the transmission and drivetrain are operable disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under Recreational Towing in the Starting and Operating section Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground 4WD MODELS Flat Tow See instructions under Recreational Towing e Auto Trans in PARK Manual Trans in gear NOT in Neutral T case NEUTRAL NONE e Tow in forward direction Front NO Wheel Lift or Dolly Tow Rear NO Flat Bed ALL BEST METHOD Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for the purpose following equipment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bum pers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed If the vehicle s battery is discharged see
200. ell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the button until you hear a single beep 64 Redial Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect Phone will call the last num ber that was dialed from your mobile phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality available on the ve hicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain duration after which the call is automatically transferred from Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the na
201. em persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed perfor mance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance repairs will not be covered by the manufactur er s warranty MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engi neers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future 251 CAUTION Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when neces sary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealership or qualified repair center Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi ti
202. emoved install them by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior side of the body chan nel Then rotate it rearward and over the chan nel until it snaps onto the exterior part of the rail To be properly located the bracket must only be clipped to the shortened rail edge 035907427 6 Open the header latches and engage the hook on each side onto the windshield loops do not close the latches 5 Make sure the Sunrider bracket on the side bows latches to the door rails Sunrider Mod els only amp 81b34abe 115 8 Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently pull the sail panels over the rear roof bow 9 Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body side channel leaving the last 3 in 7 6 cm toward the rear window loose on both sides Pulling down on the rear roof bow 3 bow will aid to reach the channel with the retainers 116 10 To install the side windows affix the win dow temporarily by attaching to the Velcro in the rear corner Start the zipper but close only about 1 in 2 5 cm 11 Insert the front retainer of the window into the door channel making sure the retainer is fully seated and properly positioned on the door frame Failure to do so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window 1 Incorrect Insertion 2 Correct Insertion 035905867 12 Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side
203. en you raise it making it difficult to put up This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl coating on the fabric top Place the vehicle in a warm area Pull steadily on the top fabric The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the top can then be in stalled If the temperature is 41 F 5 C or below do not attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or side curtains 105 CAUTION e Do not run a fabric top through an auto matic car wash Window scratches and wax build up may result Do not lower the top when the temperature is below 41 F 5 C Damage to the top may result Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame or fully lowered Do not lower the top with the windows installed Window and top damage may occur Refer to Appearance Care for Fabric Top Models in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information It contains important information on cleaning and caring for your vehicle s fabric top Do not use any tools screwdrivers etc to pry or force any of the clamps clips or retainers securing the soft top Do not force or pry the soft top framework when opening or closing Damage to the top may result WARNING e Do not drive the vehicle with the rear win dow curtain up unless the side curtains are also removed Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the vehicle causing harm to the driver and passengers e The fab
204. en moved or the engine has been started 5 Turn the ignition key fob to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine 6 Press and hold the brake pedal 7 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 8 Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position NOTE When shifting out of transfer case N Neu tral turning the engine OFF may be quired to avoid gear clash 9 Shift the automatic transmission into PARK or place manual transmission in Neutral 10 Release the brake pedal 11 Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle 12 Start the engine 13 Press and hold the brake pedal 14 Release the parking brake 15 Shift the transmission into gear release the brake pedal and clutch pedal on manual transmissions and check that the vehicle op erates normally WHAT DO IN EMERGENCIES e HAZARD WARNING FLASHER 238 YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS 2 20 22 238 e JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 239 e Jack Location 239 Spare Tire Stowage ta aes m ER eG me 239 Preparations For Jacking 239 Jacking Instructions 2 lt lt ce caosa ee o o E 240 e JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES 242 Preparations for Jump Start 242 Jump Starting Procedure 243 OWENE S 244 e SHIFT EEVER OVERRIDE 244 e TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 245 e Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob
205. ent Panel for further information HSA If you wish to turn off the HSA system follow this procedure 1 Start with the engine off and vehicle in PARK automatic transmission or NEUTRAL with clutch out manual transmission with wheels straight Apply parking brake on manual trans mission vehicle 2 Start the engine 3 With the engine running the brake applied and the clutch out rotate the steering wheel 180 counterclockwise from center 4 Press the ESC OFF switch four times within twenty seconds 5 Rotate the steering wheel 360 clockwise 180 clockwise from center 6 Cycle ignition switch OFF then ON 7 Ifthe sequence was completed properly the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will blink several times to confirm HSA is off Steps 1 7 must be completed within 90 sec onds to turn off HSA Repeat steps 1 7 to re enable HSA functionality Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the drivers steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steer ing wheel angle and vehicle s speed are suffi cient to potentially cause wheel lift it applies the appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very Severe or evasive driving maneuvers Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM can only re duce the chance of wh
206. ent it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the ISOFIX child restraint anchorage system Refer to ISOFIX Child Seat Anchorage System The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible Check belt fit periodically A child s squirm ing or sl
207. entry in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries e Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted e Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Uconnect Phonebook Names e Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say List Names e The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phonebook entries if available e To call one of the names in the list press the 4 VR button during the playing of the de sired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or De lete operations at this point e The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect M Phone if the feature s are available on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan pr
208. er 1 If your vehicle has half doors remove each half door window by opening the door and lifting the half door window out NOTE Stow half door windows carefully outside of the vehicle never inside to avoid scratches 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 3 Release the header latches and hooks from the loops on the windshield frame 4 Open the swing gate 5 Before unzipping the rear window release the first 3 in 7 6 cm of both sail panels from the channel Remove the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out of the swing gate brack ets 81b34aa7 125 e Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower corner of the window Pull the zip per up across the top and down to the left lower corner Zipper pulls will stay on the rear window Pull down on the rear window to disengage it from the zipper on the top cover 7 Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratch ing 8 Undo the Velcro that runs along the top and rear edge of the side window 9 Beginning from the rear lower corner com pletely unzip the window 81925a32 6 Remove the rear window retainer from the swing gate bracket on both the left and right sides 126 10 Once unzipped remove the side window retainers from the door channel and body side channel Repeat this step on the opposite side 11 Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle
209. er a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear storage compartment 060633923 Jack Storage Spare Tire Stowage To remove the spare tire from the carrier re move the tire cover if equipped and remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench turning them counterclockwise NOTE If you have added aftermarket accessories to the spare tire mounted carrier it cannot exceed a gross weight of 50 Ibs 23 kg including the weight of the spare tire Preparations For Jacking 1 Park on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 3 Set the parking brake 4 Shift the automatic transmission into PARK or a manual transmission into REVERSE 5 Turn the ignition to LOCK 239 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel NOTE Pa
210. er inflation of tires or mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness The Anti Lock Brake System conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph 20 km h If for any reason your foot is on the brake when the vehicle reaches 12 mph 20 km h this check will be delayed until 25 mph 40 km h The Anti Lock Brake System pump motor runs during the self test and during an ABS stop to provide the regulated hydraulic pressure The motor pump makes a low humming noise dur ing operation this is normal 208 WARNING e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will dimin ish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping dis tance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop e The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can they increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded e The ABS cannot prevent collisions includ ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning e The capabilities of an ABS equipped ve hicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others CAUTION The Anti Lock Brake System is subject to possible de
211. er regular gasoline in these engines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturer s worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the Worldwide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufac 224 turer recommends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC specifications if they are available Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and stumble If you experience these problems try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Methanol Methyl or Wood Alcohol is used in a variety of concentrations when blended with unleaded gasoline You may find fuels containing 3 or more methanol along with other alcohols called cosolvents Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While TBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol CAUTION Do not use gasolines containing Methanol or
212. er to Maintenance Schedules for filter service intervals 173 Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position full clockwise Press the A C button VERY HOT Set the Mode control at or between and Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the gt button to aos turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the WARM WEATHER Press the button to turn recirculate off be If it s sunny set the Mode control at or near 4 and turn the air conditioning on If O ai ap it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near COOL OR COLD Press the G5 button to turn recirculate off button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between and 4 then turn the air 6666 4 conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near and turn 6 TL the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between i and S COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near If it is sunny y
213. ered the re sponsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an acci dent or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your ve hicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsi bility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemi cals fertilizers de icer salt etc assure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider installing mud or stone shields be hind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a non abrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scour ing pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR cleaners or equivalent are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean o
214. ess the Voice Command 4 VR button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect Voice For best re sults the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle WARNING e t is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Continued WARNING Continued Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Front Seat Adjustment The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion near the floor While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar located under the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward Re lease the bar once you have reached the desired position Then using bod
215. et Power Uu S MEME 226 Airbag Deployment 36 estne sott Airbag Light 35 38 49 148 Auxiliary Power Outlet Bb eae a Airbag Maintenance CIL 37 aus ee iter mpm d onec 4 196 Carbon Monoxide Warning 48 Airbag Side TET 36 Cargo Light 86 Alarm Light 149 Battery 225282082200 6 254 Cellular Phone 57 165 Alarm Security Alarm 15 Keyless Transmitter Replacement Changing A Flat Tire 239 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 5 IKE 18 Check Engine Light Malfunction Antifreeze Engine Coolant 273 222552255092 25 49 Indicator Light 152 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 207 Body Mechanism Lubrication 255 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 48 Anti Lock Warning Light 148 Brake Assist System 209 Checks Safety 48 Appearance Care 264 Brake Control System Electronic 208 Child Restraint 2 38 39 44 46 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 15 312 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 42 44 Child Safety Locks 22 Child Seat 41 Clean Air Gasoline 225 Climate Control 165 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 165 COMPASS 2 5 ws 154 161 Compass Calibration
216. f your vehicle is equipped with SAB do not attach cupholders or any other objects on or around the door The inflating SAB could drive the objects into occupants causing serious injury e Do not cover or place items on the airbag covers These items may cause serious injury during inflation e Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citi zen band radios etc Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB If Equipped Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags pro vide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact The Supple mental Seat Mounted Side Airbag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats Ner Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag Location When the airbag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each airbag deploys independently that is a left side impact deploys the left airbag only and a right side impact deploys only the right airbag WARNING Being too close to the Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occupants for the best inter action with the Advanced Front Airbags Along with
217. facturer only assumes responsibility when parts which are expressly authorized or recommended by the manufacturer are attached or installed at an authorized dealer The same applies when modifications to the original condition are sub sequently made on the manufacturer s ve hicles Your warranties do not cover any part that the manufacturer did not supply Nor do they cover he cost of any repairs or adjustments that might be caused or needed because of the installation or use of non manufacturer parts components equipment materials or addi ives Nor do your warranties cover the costs of repairing damage or conditions caused by any changes to your vehicle that do not comply with he manufacturers specifications Original Mopar9 parts and accessories and other products approved by the manufacturer including qualified advice are available at your authorized dealer When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satis faction Copyright O 2010 Chrysler International HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you de sire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owne
218. fe and what is not When on a trail you should always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in terrain The key is to plan your future driving route while remembering what you are currently driving over CAUTION Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials The heat from your vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire WARNING Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo Unsecured cargo can become projec tiles in an off road situation When To Use 4L Low Range When off road driving shift into 4L Low for additional traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain ascending or descending steep hills and to increase low speed pulling power This range should be limited to extreme situa tions such as deep snow mud steep inclines or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4L Low range Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation Many off road driving conditions require the simultaneous use of the brake and throttle two footed driving When climbing rocks logs or other stepped objects using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking or lurching This technique is also used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline Driving In Snow Mud And Sand Snow In heavy snow or for additional control and raction
219. for LOW and none for OFF aj When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heat ing elements OFF the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after ap proximately 30 minutes of continuous opera tion At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 30 minutes NOTE When a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medi cation alcohol use exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Continued WARNING Continued e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
220. fully into the space between you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled per 34 son contact the Customer Center Phone num bers are provided under If You Need Assis ance WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel e f the vehicle has Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat NOTE After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags is required in a frontal or side collision Based on the impact sensors signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags S
221. g a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up and over the object WARNING Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system loading which could cause you to loose control of your vehicle Using A Spotter There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or determine the correct path Deter mining the correct path can be extremely diffi cult when you are confronting many obstacles In these cases have someone guide you over through or around the obstacle Have the person stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see the obstacle watch your tires and undercarriage and guide you through Crossing Large Rocks When approaching large rocks choose a path which ensures you drive over the largest of them with your tires This will lift your undercar riage over the obstacle The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is designed to take the abuse Always look ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires CAUTION e Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough to strike your axles or under carriage e Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large enough to contact the door sills Crossing A Ravine Gully Ditch Washout Or Rut When crossing a ravine gully ditch washout or a large rut the angled approach is the key to maintaining your vehicle s mobility Approach these obstacles at a 45 degree angle and let
222. g deep water It can push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control This could put you and your passengers at risk of injury or drowning After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steer ing suspension and exhaust system for damage e Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required e Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain com ponents steering and suspension Re tighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual e Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts e After extended operation in mud sand wa ter or similar dirty conditions have the ra diator fan brake rotors wheels brake lin ings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision If you have been operating your veh
223. g for your vehicle s fabric top e Do not use any tools Screwdrivers etc to pry or force any of the clamps clips or retainers securing the soft top Do not force or pry the soft top framework when opening or closing Damage to the top may result WARNING e Do not drive the vehicle with the rear win dow curtain up unless the side curtains are also open Dangerous exhaust gases which can kill could enter the vehicle Continued 119 WARNING Continued CAUTION Continued e The fabric upper doors and fabric top are e The soft top must be positioned properly to designed only for protection against the ensure sealing Improper installation can elements Do not rely on them to contain cause water to leak into the vehicle s inte occupants within the vehicle or to protect rior against injury during an accident Remem ber always wear seat belts NOTE Do not remove any of the three attachment CAUTION knobs unless you are planning on installing 5 Failure cautions cause 2 Release header latches from the windshield interior water damage stains or mildew on the frame top material e t is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior Careless handling and storage of the soft top may damage the s
224. g harness connector under the instrument panel by pressing the tab at the side of the connector and pulling to discon nect NOTE If the red latch on the connector is locked push the red latch to the right until you can only see the latch on one end right of the connector This will unlock the connector tab allowing the tab to be pressed down and enabling the harness to be disconnected 1 Harness Connector 2 Body Hook 3 Door Harness Strap 3 Unhook the door strap from the body hook Be careful not to allow the door to swing fully open as the mirror may damage paint 4 With the door open lift the door to clear hinge pins from their hinges and remove door To reinstall the door s perform the previous steps in the opposite order Rear Door Removal Four Door Models 1 Remove the hinge pin screws from the up per and lower outside hinges using a T50 Torx head driver Hinge Pin Screw 2 Slide front seat s fully forward 3 Remove the trim access door from the bot tom of B pillar Trim Access Door 4 Unplug the wiring harness connector NOTE If the red latch on the connector is locked push the red latch to the right until you can only see the latch on one end right of the connector This will unlock the connector tab allowing the tab to be pressed down and enabling the harness to be disconnected 20 Red Connector Latch 5 Unhook the door strap from the body hoo
225. g soft sandy Spots in a trail maintain your vehicle s momen tum and do not stop The key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire pressure accelerating slowly avoiding abrupt maneu vers and maintaining the vehicle s momentum If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes reduce your tire pres sure to a minimum of 15 psi 103 kPa to allow for a greater tire surface area Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and handling while driving on the soft sand but you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard sur faces Be sure you have a way to reinflate the ires prior to reducing the pressure CAUTION Reduced tire pressures may cause tire un seating and total loss of air pressure To reduce the risk of tire unseating while at a reduced tire pressure reduce your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High Points While driving off road you will encounter many ypes of terrain These varying types of terrain bring different types of obstacles Before pro ceeding review the path ahead to determine he correct approach and your ability to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong eeping a firm grip on the steering wheel bring he vehicle to a complete stop and then inch he vehicle forward until it makes contact with he object Apply the throttle lightly while hold in
226. g system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymna sium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a mal by product of the process that gener ates the non toxic gas used for airbag infla tion These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instructions for cleaning Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretension Maintaining Your Airbag System ers cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioner and
227. ge Normal Starting Gasoline Engine NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Tip Start Feature Automatic Transmission Only Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Extreme Cold Weather below 20 or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these tempera tures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater available from your autho rized dealer is recommended If Engine Fails To Start WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious per sonal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission
228. ghts with Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Oniy wie seus eve o 84 s T m Signals d em 84 e Lane Change Assist 85 e Lights On Reminder 85 Headlight Dimmer Switch 85 rc 85 e Front Fog Lights If Equipped 85 Rear Fog Lights If Equipped 85 e Instrument Panel Dimmer 85 Interior lights lt c eos e e rS eS sers 86 Headlight Leveling System If Equipped 87 e WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS 87 e Windshield Wiper Operation 88 e Intermittent Wiper System 88 exWindshieldiWashers 2 000000 6 0060906 88 LLL 89 STEERING COLUMN IT 89 e ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED 90 To Activate 722222255022 2554200 90 e To Set a Desired Speed 90 UT 90 To Resume Speed 90 e To Vary the Speed Setting 90 e To Accelerate for Passing 91 s ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET ere 91 54 e CUPHOLDERS 93 ei Front Gupholders 93 e Rear Cupholders 93 STORAGE n 93 Console Storage Compartment 93 Rear Storage Com
229. he System fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists A system fault can occur by any of the following sce narios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driv ing next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE f your vehicle is equipped with a match ing full size spare wheel and tire assem bly it has a tire pressure monitoring sen sor and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS In the event that the matching full size spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire the next ignition key cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell tale Light to be ON a LOW TIRE mes sage displayed for a minimum of five seconds and a chime to sound Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn OFF the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message as long as none of the road tires are below the low pressure warning threshold If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire
230. he engine at moderate speeds for five minutes before full loads are applied Engine Idling In Cold Weather Avoid prolonged idling in ambient tempera tures below O F 18 C Long periods of idling may be harmful to your engine because com bustion chamber temperatures can drop so low that the fuel may not burn completely Incom plete combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings and injector nozzles Also the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine Stopping the Engine The following chart should be used as a guide in determining the amount of engine idle time required to sufficiently cool down the turbo charger before shut down depending upon the type of driving and the amount of cargo Before turning off your turbo diesel engine always allow the engine to return to normal idle speed and run for several seconds This charger This is particularly necessary after any period of hard driving Idle the engine a few minutes before routine shutdown After full load operation idle the engine three to five minutes before shutting it oil and coolant to carry excess heat away from the combustion chamber bearings internal components and turbocharger This is espe cially important for turbocharged charge air cooled engines assures proper lubrication of the turbo down This idle period will allow the lubricating TURBOCHARGER COO
231. he front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range 4H provides additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces and should not be used on dry pavement The 4WD Indicator Light located in the in strument cluster will illuminate when the trans fer case is shifted into the 4H position N Neutral Position This range disengages the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operat ing for further information 4L Position This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range 4L provides additional traction and maximum pull ing power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h The 4WD Indicator Light located in the in strument cluster will illuminate when the trans fer case is shifted into the 4L position NOTE When in 4WD the ESC Off Indicator Light will display in the instrument cluster Shifting Procedure 2H to 4H or 4H to 2H Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after completing the shift Apply a constant force when shifting the trans fer case leve
232. he hard top is sitting flush with the body at the sides and check to ensure that there is a uniform gap between the lift glass and hard top NOTE e The Torx fasteners that attach the hard top to the body should be torqued to 66 in Ib 22 in Ib 7 5 N m 2 5 N m e t is not necessary to pinch connection when reinstalling washer hose Push on until click is heard 102 DOOR FRAME WARNING Do not drive your vehicle on pavement with the door frame s removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide This proce dure is furnished for use during off road op eration only CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew Opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior Careless handling and storage of the re movable door frame s may damage the Seals causing water to leak into the vehi cle s interior The door frame s must be positioned prop erly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle s interior Door Frame Removal 1 Unscrew and remove the door frame attach ment knobs two per door WARNING Use both hands to remove the door frames The door frames will fold and could cause injury if both hands are not used 2 Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the front of the door frame 3 Pull the fram
233. he lock turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being re moved unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ON RUN position and the brake pedal is depressed SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key9 Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation There fore only keys that are programmed to the 14 vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the engine NOTE A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will urn on for three seconds for a bulb check If he light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the elec ronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the engine Either of hese conditio
234. he transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selec tion press and release the SELECT button until On or Off appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen gers doors When All Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When on is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selec tion press and release the SELECT button until or Off appears Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power win dow switches r
235. hicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 25 Odometer Trip Odometer Display Area The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage Refer to Odom eter Trip Odometer ECO Fuel Saver Indica tor Button for additional information Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the fol lowing odometer messages will display ECO exe Fuel Saver Indicator Off ECO ON Fuel Saver Indicator On dOOF mom de Rs Door Ajar QATE Liftgate Ajar LoWtirE Low Tire Pressure HOTOIL Transmission Oil Temperature Above Normal Limits gASCAP Fuel Cap Fault noFUSE Fuse Fault CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required ESPOFF ESP Deactivated ECO ON Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO ON indicator will illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to in crease fuel economy The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO ON depending on driving habits and vehicle usage Press the Odometer Trip Odometer ECO Fuel Saver Indicator button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings or the ECO display LoW tirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles
236. hicle will be driven When properly set the compass will automatically account for this difference Setting The Compass Variance Refer to the variance map for the correct com pass variance zone To check the variance zone the ignition must be ON Press and hold the left button located on the instrument clus ter for approximately 10 seconds to enter the variance mode and release the button when the VAR symbol appears The current variance value will also be displayed To change the zone press the left button once to increment the zone The default is Zone 8 After Zone 15 the values will wrap around to Zone 1 When the correct zone is displayed per the Compass Variance Zone Map for the zone that the vehicle is located in wait for about ten sec onds then the trip computer will store the variance value memory and the compass will resume normal operation NOTE The U S Metric display will change from English to Metric or Metric to English before the VAR symbol appears however it will revert back to its original setting after pro gramming the compass functions e h2 S 9 ein 49 l NI 14 2 Qs 522 2 FL 80bbc346 Compass Variance Map 157 Outside Temperature If the outside temperature is more than 131 F 55 the display will show 131 F 55 When the outside temperature is less than 40
237. his can be used when out side conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recircula tion will cause the LED in the control button to 171 illuminate After ten minutes the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off NOTE e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled e In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fog ging The Recirculation mode is not al lowed in the floor defrost or defrost floor mode in order to improve window clear ing Recirculation will be disabled auto matically if these modes are selected e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recir culation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in floor defrost or defrost floor mode Attempting to use the recirculation while in these 172 modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Most of the time when in Automatic Op eration you can temporarily put the sys tem into Recirculation Mode by pressing the Recirculation button However under certain conditions while in Automatic Mode the system is blowing a
238. hone call as to that for the mobile phone directly WARNING To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emergency your mobile phone must be e turned on e paired to the Uconnect System and have network coverage Breakdown Service If Equipped If you need Breakdown service Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Breakdown service NOTE The Breakdown service number has to be setup before using To setup press the button and say Setup Breakdown Service and follow prompts Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated cus tomer service Some services require immedi 65 ate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to en
239. icator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL t is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems The light will illumi nate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor quality fuel etc may illuminate he light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several ypical driving styles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require owing CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Im mediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as refer enced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others 27 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If the Electronic Stability Program ESP Traction C
240. icator light will flash on off When enabled HDC senses the terrain and activates when the vehicle is descending a hill HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions The speed corre sponds to the transmission gear selected Gear Approximate HDC Set Speed 1st 1 mph 1 5 km h 2nd 2 5 mph 4 km h 3rd 4 mph 6 5 km h 4th 5 5 mph 9 km h DRIVE 7 5 mph 12 km h REVERSE 1 mph 1 5 km h However the driver can override HDC opera ion by applying the brake to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed If more speed is desired during HDC control the ac celerator pedal will increase vehicle speed in he usual manner When either the brake or the accelerator is released HDC will control the vehicle at the original set speed Enabling HDC 1 Shift the transfer case into 4WD LOW range Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Start ing and Operating for further information 2 Press the Hill Descent button The Hill Descent Control Indicator Light in the instru ment cluster will turn on solid If the transfer case is not in 4WD LOW range the Descent Control Indicator Light will flash for five seconds and HDC will not be enabled Disabling HDC 1 Press the Hill Descent button or shift the transfer case out of AWD LOW range The Hill Descent Control Indicator light in the instru ment cluster will turn off TIRE
241. icle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary e f you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Im pacted material can cause a wheel imbal ance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is inter rupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these conditions you will ob serve a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered nor mal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system 205 This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power Steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be ob tained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of
242. iculate Filter DPF it is acceptable to have an oil level up to 3 8 inch 10 mm above the MAX line Beyond 3 8 inch 10 mm it is recommended to change the oil The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding 1 U S Quart 0 95 L of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines Engine Oil Selection 2 8L Diesel Engine se only Diesel Engine Oils conforming to API American Petroleum Institute Quality CJ 4 or 4 For countries that use the ACEA European il Categories for Service Fill Oils use engine s that meet the requirements of ACEA C3 ngine Oil Viscosity 2 8L Diesel Engine or vehicles equipped with a Diesel Particulate ter DPF 5W 30 ESP fully synthetic low ash that meets Chrysler Material Standard MS 11106 must be used For vehicles that are not equipped with a Diesel Particulate Filter DPF OW 40 ESP fully syn thetic oil that meets Chrysler Material Standard MS 10725 may be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are f
243. ies and or luggage etc Also it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmental rain snow etc If the temperature is below 72 24 and or the top has been folded down for a period of time the top will appear to have shrunk when you raise it making it difficult to put up This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl coating on the fabric top Place the vehicle in a warm area Pull steadily on the top fabric The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the top can then be snapped into place If the temperature is 41 5 or below do not attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or side curtains CAUTION Do not run a fabric top through an auto matic car wash Window scratches and wax buildup may result Do not lower the top when the temperature is below 41 F 5 Damage to the top may result e Do not lower the top when the windows are dirty Grit may scratch the window Continued CAUTION Continued e Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame or fully lowered Do not lower the top with the windows installed Window and top damage may occur e Refer to Appearance Care for Fabric Top Models in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information It contains important information on cleaning and carin
244. ign material Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinders should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced If necessary add fluid to bring level to the full level mark on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear If the brake fluid level is abnormally low check system for leaks Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information WARNING Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued WARNING Continued e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed con tainer Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sud den brake failure This could result in a accident e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
245. ild seat tether rout ing Fold and Tumble Rear Seat Two Door Models NOTE e Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to reposition the front seats e Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily 1 Lift the seatback release lever and fold the seatback forward Rear Seat Release 2 Slowly flip the entire seat forward 030933924 Folding Rear Seat 3 Return the seat to the normal position 4 Raise the rear seatback using the assist strap and firmly lock the seat into position Removing the Rear Seat Two Door Models WARNING e ltis extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Continued WARNING Continued Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly e Ina collision you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments Always be sure that the seats are fully latched 1 Fold the rear seat forward following steps 1 hrough 3 under Fold and Tumble Rear Seat in this section 2 Press down on the release bar on each side and pull the seat out and away from the lo
246. ile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profle support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e call a name from downloaded or Uconnect Phonebook follow the proce dure in Call by Saying a Name section e Automatic download and update if sup ported begins as soon as the phone Bluetooth wireless connection is made to the Uconnect Phone For example after you start the vehicle Maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of en tries downloaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if available the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use Only the phonebook of the currently con nected mobile phone is accessible e Only the mobile phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the mobile phonebook e This downloaded phonebook cannot be ed ited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are transferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Entry f equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use his feature press the button and say Phonebook D
247. iler brakes to your vehi cle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident e Towing any trailer will increase your stop ping distance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Manual Transmission If Equipped If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage Automatic Transmission If Equipped The DRIVE range can be selected when tow ing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the O D OFF mode should be selected NOTE Using the O D OFF mode while operating the vehicle under heavy operating condi tions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to Maintenance Schedule for transmission fluid change intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing O D Off If Equipped To
248. in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warn ing could result in serious injury or death LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation o the position lights headlights headlight beam selection passing lights flash to pass fog lights if equipped instrument panel light dim ming and turn signals The lever is located on the left side of the steering column 031407684 Multifunction Lever Headlights and Position Lights Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent for position lights and instrument panel lights Turn to the second detent for headlight operation NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process 4 Y Headlight Switch 031407685 83 Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on turn the end of the multi function lever to the AUTO position third de tent When the system is on the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position To turn the Automatic System off turn the end of the multifunction lever out of the
249. in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can re sult in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals More frequent rotation is permissible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be cor rected prior to rotation being performed CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different Size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram t C E x 055703771 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary
250. ine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Drain the fuel filter water separator unit Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid 1 Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary Inspect the brake linings Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 291 Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tt Rotate tires Replace engine air cleaner filter Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Drain the fuel filter water separator unit 1 Replace the fuel filter water separator unit Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary a Inspect the brake linings Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 25 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 37 500 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Drain the fuel filter water separator unit Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid 1 Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary J Inspect the brake linings Replace the engine accessory drive belt
251. ine will not be stopped 4 If the STOP START system is manually turned off the engine can only be started and stopped by cycling the ignition switch 5 The STOP START system will reset itself back to an ON condition every time the key is turned off and back on To Manually Turn On The Start Stop System 1 Press the STOP START Off switch located on the switch bank 2 The light on the switch will turn off System Malfunction If there is a malfunction in the STOP START System the system will not shut down the engine A SERVICE STOP START SYSTEM message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Under standing Your Instrument Panel for further in formation The system will need to be checked by your authorized dealer MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline CAUTION Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch 185 During cold weather you may experience increased effort in shifting until the trans mission fluid warms up Th
252. ing is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words cel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active applica tion When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the windows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the Voice Command button and say Help or Main Menu Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Com mand is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command button You may say Main Menu to switch to
253. ion rotate the seatback upright until it locks and push the seat rearward until the track locks NOTE e The front passenger seats have a track memory which returns the seat to just past the halfway point of the track regard less of its original position e The recliner and easy entry levers should not be used during the automatic return ing of the seat to its sitting position Tip n Slide Seats Two Door Models This feature allows the front seats to be rotated toward the instrument panel to allow easier entry into the rear seats Driver and Passenger Seats In addition to Easy Entry the driver and pas senger seats are also equipped with Tip n Slide This feature allow for easier entry for rear passengers Pull upward on the recline lever and slide the seat the entire seat forward Easy Entry With the seat forward pull the entire seat as sembly toward the instrument panel Heated Seats If Equipped On some models the front driver and passen ger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The controls for each seat are located on switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one
254. ip the Freedom bag Lift the Freedom bag into the vehicle with the closed hooks and straps facing the back of the rear seat Attach the clips at the bottom of the bag to the child restraint anchorages located at the base of the rear seat A 035707993 Install the seat attachment strap at the top of the bag through the loops Wrap the upper strap around the rear head restraints and loop the strap through the buckle Pull on the strap to tighten the Freedom bag securely against the rear seat 035707996 Front Panel s Installation NOTE Set the panels on the windshield frame so that there is no overhang Also make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the body 1 Install the right panel first then the left panel 2 Reinstall the panel s using the same steps for removal in reverse order 100 Front Panel s Installation with Rear Hard Top Removed 1 Turn the left and right panels over and move the spacer block located on the rear of the panel upward 90 degrees 035707391 NOTE The front panel s must be positioned prop erly to ensure sealing Set the panels on the windshield frame so that there is no over hang Also make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the body 2 Install the right panel first then the left panel 3 Reinstall the panel s using the same steps for removal in reverse order Rear Hard Top Removal 1 Remove both front panels Refer to Front P
255. ipped The message is located in the Compass Temperature display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Compass Variance Refer to Compass Display for more informa tion Calibrate Compass Refer to Compass Display for more informa tion SOUND SYSTEMS Refer to your Sound Systems Booklet STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the Switches 164 B 045033001 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Press ing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker Switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button will make the radio Switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD HDD AUXNES etc The left hand control is rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for th
256. ir out the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the Recirculation button is pressed the indicator will flash and then turn off This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation Mode at this time If you would like the system to go into Recirculation Mode you must first move the Mode knob to Panel Panel Floor and then press the Recirculation button This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine over heating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recom mended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure adequate system lu brication to minimize the possibility of compres sor damage when the system is started again Wind
257. is in PARK for automatic transmissions or in gear NOT in Neutral for manual transmissions Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operat ing for detailed instructions 246 CAUTION Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing e Failure to follow these towing methods could result in damage to the transmission and or transfer case Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited War ranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE e ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 8L 249 e ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 8L DIESEL 250 e ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD 1 251 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 251 e REPLACEMENT PARTS 251 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 251 Engine Oil Gasoline Engine 252 Engine Oil Diesel Engine 253 eiEngine 254 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 254 Maintenance Free Battery 254 Air Conditioner Maintenance 255 e Body Lubrication 255 e Windshield Wiper Blades 256 e Adding Washer Fluid 256 eExhaustiSystem t 6 nom oc muse TD 256 248 eiCoolingiSystem 722222222522 257 e Brake System 22222222 22222222 2022 260 Automatic Transmission If Equipped
258. is is normal 1 3 5 2 4 6 R 81 06226 Shift Pattern Shifting Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator pedal You should always use first gear when starting from a standing position if under heavy load or when pulling a trailer Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuel economy and performance it should be upshifted as listed in recommended shift speed chart Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up shift speeds may not apply Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH KM H Engine Speeds 1102 2103 3 to 4 4to5 5106 3 8L Gasoline Accel 15 24 24 39 34 55 47 76 56 90 Cruise 10 16 19 31 27 43 37 60 41 66 2 8L Diesel Accel 15 24 24 39 34 55 47 76 56 90 Cruise 10 16 19 31 27 43 37 60 41 66 186 Downshifting Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recommended to preserve brakes when driv ing down steep hills In addition downshifting at the right time provides better acceleration when you desire to resume speed Downshift progressively Do not skip gears to avoid over speeding the engine and clutch WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle c
259. ivate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on an 8 or greater incline 3 for manual transmission equipped ve hicles 210 e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direc tion i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer where the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur which could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is respon sible for braking the vehicle The system will only work if the intended direc ion of the vehicle and vehicle gear match For example if the intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE automatic ransmission equipped vehicle and the acti vation criteria are met HSA will activate HSA On Automatic Transmission Vehicles The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears on vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL HSA On Manual Transmission Vehicles The system will work in REVERSE forward gears and NEUTRAL on manual transmission equipped vehicles The system does not rec ognize NEUTRAL on manual vehicles thus it will hold the vehicle on an incline for a short period while in NEUTRAL regardless of clutch position To prevent this do not attempt t
260. ized dealer for service 154 hicle Refer to Starting Procedures in Start ing And Operating COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER The Compass Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster It features a driver interactive display displays information such as outside temperature compass direction and trip information Compass Trip Computer Control Buttons NOTE The system will display the last known out side temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is dis played Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore tem perature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving Press and release the left button on the instru ment cluster to access Press and hold the left rom English to Metric d Press and hold the left ment cluster while func Reset Change Display he computer displays button on the instru ment cluster for two to three seconds to switch isplays button on the instru ion is being displayed reset or change the display The following trip displays can be reset or changed e AVG ECO economy changes to present fuel e ET will reset display Trip Conditions Average Fuel Economy AVG ECO This display shows the average fuel economy since the last reset Estimated Range DTE This display shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the
261. k 6 With the door open lift the door to clear hinge pins from their hinges and remove door To reinstall the door s perform the previous steps in the opposite order DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks The front two door models and rear doors four door models are equipped with a rocker type interior door lock To lock the door when leaving your vehicle press the LOCK position and close the door NOTE The ignition key that is used to start the vehicle is used to lock or unlock the doors swing gate and console storage Manual Door Lock WARNING e For personal security reasons and safety in an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally in jured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Locks If Equipped The door lock switch is located on each front door panel Press the switch forward to lock the doors and rearward to unlock the doors Power Door Lock Switch WARNING For personal security reasons and safety in an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Never leave children
262. laced in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains on with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light continues to flash when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an el evated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 153 32 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Compass Mini Trip Computer Display If Equipped When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC messages For further infor mation refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Mini Trip Computer mes sages Refer to Mini Trip Computer for further information 33 Water In Fuel Indicator Light Diesel Only B 34 Wait To Start Light Diesel Only This light will illuminate when the ignition switch is first turned to the 00 ON position Wait until the light turns off before starting the ve This light indicates water has col lected in the fuel filter and should be drained immediately See an author
263. ld instruct all other occupants to fasten their seatbelts If the driver seatbelt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will chime as a single notification and illuminate the Seat Belt Reminder Light then will proceed to the 96 second reminder sequence NOTE BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert If BeltAlert is deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unfas tened Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is an accident Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the driver and right front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the steering wheel The passenger Ad vanced Front Airbag is mounted in the instru ment panel above the glove compartment The letters SRS are embossed on the airbag cov ers 022633796 Advanced F
264. lean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models CAUTION To maintain the appearance of your vehicle s interior trim and top follow these precautions Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top down as exposure to sun or rain may damage interior trim e Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top material as damage may result Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry on the paint leaving a streak After cleaning your vehicle s fabric top al ways make sure it is completely dry before lowering Be especially careful when washing the win dows by following the directions for Care of Fabric Top Windows WASHING Use Car Wash or equivalent or mild soap suds lukewarm water and a brush with soft bristles If extra cleaning is required use Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or equivalent or a mild foaming cleaner on the entire top but support the top from underneath RINSING
265. led maintenance On Non EVIC equipped vehicles CHANgE OIL will flash in the instrument cluster odom eter and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary The oil change indicator message will illumi nate approximately 7 000 miles 11 200 km after the most recent oil change was per formed Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within 500 miles 800 km However an earlier oil change at 3 000 miles 5 000 km may be required if the vehicle is operated under Severe Duty Conditions later in this section NOTE The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six 278 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an ex tended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 7 500 miles 12 000 km or six months whichever comes first Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this scheduled oil change is per formed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Instrument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odometer in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further information At Each Stop for Fuel Check the engine oil
266. liseconds The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you 36 are not seated properly or if items are posi tioned in the area where the side airbag in flates This especially applies to children Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occupants for the best inter action with the Advanced Front Airbag Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts front and side impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to certain impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag de ployment if the communication network re mains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If A Deployment Occurs The front airbags are designed to deflate im mediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean some thing is wrong with the airba
267. ll sound again after a five second delay for another 30 seconds If the trigger remains present this cycle will repeat for up to five minutes To Arm The System 1 Remove the key from the ignition switch and exit the vehicle 2 Lock the doors and liftgate by pressing the power door LOCK switch or the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter NOTE The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers or the driver s door lock cyl inder 3 Close all the doors The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this period opening any door or the swing gate will cancel the arming process If the Vehicle Security Alarm arms successfully the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set 15 To Disarm The System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid Sentry Key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON RUN position NOTE Unlocking the doors with the manual door lock plungers or the driver s door lock cylinder will not disarm the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to pro tect your vehicle however you can create conditions
268. llumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approxi mately one minute and then remain continu ously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow he TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire Size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may re sult when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam age Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your ve
269. lue Run Lamp Red Feed Wireless Control Switch M19 25 Amp Auto Shut Down Module M14 20 Amp Trailer Tow Ex Natural ASD 1 and 2 M28 10 Amp Powertrain Con Yellow port Only M20 15 Amp Cabin Compart Red__ trol Module M15 20 Amp Climate Control Blue ment Node Inte M29 Yellow System Rear rior Light Switch M30 15 Amp Wiper Motor Frt View Mirror Bank Blue 21962 Diagnostic Cabin Compart M21 20 Amp Auto Shut Down Feed ment Node Yellow ASD 3 M31 20 Amp Backup Lamps PUT M22 10 Amp Right Horn Yellow Red LOW M32 10 Amp Airbag Controller Switch Tire M23 10 Amp Left Horn HI Red TT EUROPE Pressure Moni Red LOW M33 10 Amp Powertrain Con tor Glow Plug M24 25 Amp Rear Wiper Red troller Module Export Natural Diesel Only 270 CAUTION e When installing the Integrated Power Mod ule cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct am perage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected Cavity Car
270. m 1 Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer T Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service and boot seals replace if necessary off road desert operation or more than 5046 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 2 Inspect the transfer case fluid Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 281 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Q Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 37 500 Miles 60 000 km or 45 000 Miles 72 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tF Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals re
271. malfunction the system must be replaced Manual Transmission If Equipped Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturers recommended manual transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3 16 in 4 76 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless the lubricant has become contaminated with water If con taminated with water the fluid should be changed immediately Transfer Case If Equipped Fluid Level Check The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill hole A when the vehicle is in a level position 263 Adding Fluid Fluid should be added only at filler hole until fluid begins to run out of the hole Drain First remove the fill plug B then the drain plug C The recommended tightening torque for he drain and fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft Ibs 20 to 34 N m CAUTION When replacing the plugs do not overtighten them You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturers
272. me of the language you wish to switch to English Dutch French German Italian or Spanish if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages For command translations and alternate com mands in supported languages refer to Com mand Translations Emergency Assistance If Equipped If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number NOTE The default number is 112 The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area e If supported this number may be pro grammable on some systems To do this press the button and say Setup followed by Emergency e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully mak ing a p
273. ming belt and timing belt tensioner Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary Inspect the brake linings Inspect the manual transmission fluid add as necessary Drain and refill the automatic transmission fluid Replace main sump filter and spin on cooler return filter if equipped Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Inspection and service should be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or sus pected Retain all receipts 297 298 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE YOU NEEDASSISTANCE 302 ARGENTINA 302 302 e AUSTRIA coce osare maea enne a 302 BALANCE OF THE CARIBBEAN 302 BELGIUM c caaea mame e 302 s BOLIVIA eire e t ER EIE 302 302 BULGARIA 303 AUGUE 303 303 2222272222225 303 ACOSTA RICA 252720222002 303 e CROATIA 22220 303 e CZECH REPUBLIC lt o soes e ae e 303 DENMARK 303 300 e DOMINICAN REPUBLI
274. mobile phones are the vehicle at the same time For example priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present i the vehicle the Uconnect Phone will use the priority 3 mobile phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority e 53 0 59 mobile phone at any time refer to Ad vanced Phone Connectivity Dial by Saying a Number Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial e The system will prompt you to say the num ber you want to call e For example you can say 151 1234 5555 e The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call e The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John 60 Doe where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phone book e The Uconnect Phone will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone num ber which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your U
275. mpass Temperature Display e ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED UT eo eaaa e a Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays e Oil Change Required ooo o EET Trip Functions 2222222 222222222252 2 Compass Display ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped TT Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 142 e SOUND SYSTEMS o reee enese eem 164 e STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS 164 e Radio Operation 164 SACO moa ee 164 e CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE 165 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES 165 CLIMATE CONTROLS cis ceca eee e 165 Manual Heating and Air Conditioning 165 Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped 168 Operating Tips 172 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 69 O OOO 040133797 1 Air Outlet 7 Climate Controls 2 Instrument Cluster 8 Power Outlet 3 Radio 9 Lower Switch Bank 4 Assist Handle 10 Power Mirror Switch If Equipped 5 Glove Compartment 11 Horn 6 Power Window Switches 143 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER GASOLINE mu E S 801001297 60 eh 7440 P RN BESS 0 PEE EEE 040335629 144 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DIESEL velt gt 1004297 7 140 km h 040336333
276. n MOPAR Jeep Soft Glass Window Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all plastic windows without scratching It removes fine scratches to improve visibility and provides UV protection to help prevent yellowing 2 When washing never use hot water or anything stronger than a mild soap Never use solvents such as alcohol or harsh cleaning agents 3 Always rinse thoroughly with cold water then wipe with a soft and slightly moist clean cloth 267 4 When removing frost snow or ice never use a scraper or de icing chemicals Use warm water only if you must clean the window quickly 5 Debris sand mud dirt dust or salt from off road driving will have a major impact on zipper operation Even normal on road driving and vehicle washing will eventually impact win dow zipper operation To maintain ease of use of the window zippers each window zipper should be cleaned and lubricated regularly Use MOPAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent to ease zipper opera ion Before applying make sure the zipper eeth are clear of sand mud and other mate ials Clean both sides of the zipper not just one side Rinse both zipper halves with fresh water and allow to dry Aggressively work the OPAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubri cant or equivalent into the zipper teeth If a Stuck zipper slide is experienced work the OPAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubri cant or equivalent into the zipper slide Several appli
277. n afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure 209 in proportion to amount of throttle applied as he vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel WARNING If the clutch pedal manual transmission only remains pressed during the application of the throttle the HSA will disengage allowing the vehicle to roll down the incline This could cause a collision with another vehicle or ob ject To avoid this do not apply throttle while pressing the clutch pedal until you are ready to release the clutch Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to act
278. n Neutral for recreational towing Continued CAUTION Continued Before recreational towing perform the procedure outlined under Shifting Into NEUTRAL to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL Otherwise inter nal damage will result e Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmis sion and or transfer case damage Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged Shifting Into Neutral N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position without first fully en gaging the parking brake The transfer case N Neutral position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move even if the transmission is in PARK The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in N Neutral before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 Turn OFF the engine 3 Press and hold the brake pedal 4 Shift the automatic transmi
279. n occur if you drive too fast or through too deep of water Water can cause permanent damage to engine drive line or other vehicle components and your brakes will be less effective once wet and or mudgy e This vehicle is capable of crossing through water at a depth of 30 inches 76 cm at Speeds no greater than 5 mph 8 km h Water ingestion can occur causing damage to your vehicle Before You Cross Any Type Of Water As you approach any type of water you need to determine if you can cross it safely and respon sibly If necessary get out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick You need to be sure of its depth approach angle current and bottom condition Be careful of murky or muddy waters check for hidden obstacles Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the vehicle if necessary The key to 204 a safe crossing is the water depth current and bottom conditions On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle Be sure to consider this when determining the depth and the ability to safely cross Crossing Puddles Pools Flooded Areas Or Other Standing Water Puddles pools flooded or other standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy waters These water types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate water depth approach angle and bottom condition Murky or muddy water hole
280. n order to remove the rear storage compartment cover use the following procedure NOTE The rear storage compartment latch should not be used as cargo tie down 1 Flip up the pull loop so it is perpendicular straight up to the top surface of the tray 2 Pull up on the loop and twist it 90 degrees so it is parallel to the slotted hole in the tray 3 Open the rear compartment cover Rear Storage Cover 94 DUAL TOP IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top you must remove one of the tops from the ve hicle If the soft top is removed the pivot brackets must also be removed from the sport bar The soft top was installed at the factory for shipping purposes only The soft top and the hard top are to be used indepen dently Removal is mandatory to prevent any possible wear and tear on the soft top Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage result ing from both tops remaining on the vehicle at the same time for extended periods of time Removing the Soft Top 1 Locate and remove the two boxes that con tain the following items e Right and left door frames e Door frame attachment knobs four for two door models six for four door mod els Right and left quarter windows Rear window e Two rear window roll up straps e Two Sunrider equipped e Two rear swing gate brackets secure straps if 2 Remove the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rea
281. n the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly press the center button then lower the lever com pletely Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transmission is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped with an auto matic transmission apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK other wise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING Never use the PARK position on an auto matic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage
282. nd rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for a shift to take place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case When operating your vehicle in 4L the engine speed will be approximately three times four times for Rubicon models that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position without first fully en gaging the parking brake The transfer case N Neutral position disengages both the front and rear driveshaft from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Shift Positions For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2H Position This range is used for normal street and high way driving on hard surfaced roads 4H Position This range locks t
283. ng the engine 2300 193 FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION COMMAND TRAC I OR ROCK TRAC Operating Instructions Precautions The transfer case provides four mode posi tions e 2H Two wheel drive high range e 4H Four wheel drive high range e N Neutral e 4L Four wheel drive low range LD Four Wheel Drive Shift Controls 194 The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H position for normal street and highway conditions such as hard surfaced roads In the event that additional traction is required the transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by simply moving the shift lever to one of these positions The 4H and 4L positions are in tended for loose slippery road surfaces only and not intended for normal driving Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on hard surfaced roads will cause increased tire wear and dam age to the driveline components The 4WD Indicator Light located in the in strument cluster alerts the driver that the ve hicle is in four wheel drive and the front and rear driveshafts are locked together The light will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position NOTE Do not attempt to shift when only the front or rear wheels are spinning The transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and the front a
284. ng the tire pres sure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could dam age the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor NOTE The TPMS is not intended to replace nor mal tire care and maintenance nor to provide warning of a tire failure or condi tion The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not 222 reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure
285. nnect the stabilizer sway bar shift to either 4H or 4L and press the SWAY BAR switch obtain the off road position Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Oper ating for further information The Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash until the stabilizer sway bar has been fully disconnected 197 The stabilizer sway bar may be torque locked due to left and right suspension height differences This condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle load ing In order for the stabilizer sway bar to disconnect reconnect the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned This alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side To return to on road mode press the SWAY BAR switch again WARNING If the stabilizer sway bar will not return to on road mode vehicle stability is greatly re duced Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph 29 km h Driving faster than 18 mph 29 km h may cause loss of control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury Contact your local authorized dealer for assistance 198 ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road appli cations Specific design characteristics give hem a higher center of gravity than ordinary Cars An advantage of the higher ground clear
286. ns will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds f the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for onger than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electron ics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it cannot be pro grammed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identifica tion Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed See your autho rized dealer if you require replacement or ad ditional keys for your vehicle NOTE When h
287. o During the recording you may press the Voice Command button to stop re cording You proceed by saying one of the following commands Save to save the memo Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording 75 Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the Voice Command 4 button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo e Delete All to delete all memos System Setup To switch to system setup you may say on of the following e Change to system setup e Main menu system setup e Switch to system setup e Change to setup e Main menu setup or e Switch to setup 76 In this mode you may say the following com mands e Language English e Language French e Language Spanish e Language Dutch e Language Deutsch e Language Italian e Tutorial e Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command button first and wait for the beep before speaking the In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the sys tem recognizing their voice commands or num bers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Pr
288. o amp Cia S A Av Cristobal de Mendoza 2do Anillo y Canal Isuto Santa Cruz Bolivia Tel 591 3 336 3100 Fax 591 3 334 0229 BRAZIL Chrysler do Brasil Av Alfred Jurzykowski 562 09680 900 S o Bernardo do Campo S P Tel 55 11 4173 6611 Fax 55 11 4173 9200 BULGARIA BALKAN STAR Resbarska Str 5 1510 Sofia Tel 359 2 91988 Fax 359 2 945 40 14 CHILE Comercial Chrysler S A Av Americo Vespucio 1601 Quilicura Santiago Chile Tel 56 2 620 7600 Fax 56 2 730 6201 CHINA Chrysler Group China Sales Limited 16F Gemdale Plaza Tower A No 91 Jian Guo Road Chaoyang District Beijing 100022 P R China Chrysler Brand Tel 400 650 1195 Dodge Brand Tel 400 650 0118 COLOMBIA Chrysler Colombia S A Avenida Calle 26 70A 25 Bogota Colombia Tel 57 1 4236700 Fax 57 1 410 5667 COSTA RICA AutoStar La Uruca frente al Banco Nacional San Jos Costa Rica Tel 506 295 0000 Fax 506 295 0052 CROATIA EUROLINE Kovinska 5 10 000 Zagreb Tel 385 1 3441 111 Fax 385 1 3441 113 CZECH REPUBLIC Chrysler Czech Republic s r o Daimlerova 2296 2 149 45 Praha 4 Chodov Czech Republic Tel 420 0 2 71077 111 Tel 420 0 2 25101 111 Fax 420 0 2 71077 507 DENMARK Chrysler Danmark ApS Frederikskaj 4 DK 1790 K benhavn V Tel 45 0 35 256 830 Fax 45 0 35 256 832 DOMINICAN REPUBLIC Reid y Compa ia John F Kennedy Casi Esq Lope de Vega
289. o ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant reserve tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant anti freeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an over heated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authori ies to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately 259 Engine Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radi
290. o roll down a hill simply by putting the transmission in NEUTRAL and letting gravity act on the vehicle as the HSA will prevent the vehicle from rolling Instead use the appropriate gear for moving in the desired direction Towing With HSA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer WARNING e fyouuse a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid rolling down the hill while resuming accel eration manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle e HSA is not a parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the trans mission in PARK and using the parking brake it will roll down the hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember to use the park ing brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle NOTE The HSA system may also be turned on and off if the vehicle is equipped with the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Re fer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrum
291. o select a personal setting in the setup menu DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN but V ton to scroll downward through the sub menus Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime 20 Battery Low with single chime emory 1 2 Profile Set emory 1 2 Profile Recall emory System Disabled Vehicle Not in Park with a single chime Automatic Transmission emory System Disabled Vehicle in Motion with a single chime Manual Transmission emory System Disabled Seat Belt Buck led with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park Automatic Transmission Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle in Motion Manual Transmission Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km h Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km h Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Liftgate Ajar with a single chime Check Gascap refer to Adding Fuel in Starting And Operating
292. o the LOCK position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds then restart the engine 5 Move the shift lever to the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the trans mission will return to normal operation If the problem persists PARK REVERSE and NEU TRAL will continue to operate Only second gear will operate in the DRIVE position Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle A clutch within the torque con verter engages automatically at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during acceleration the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages Five Speed Automatic Transmission 2 8L Diesel Engine The electronically controlled transmission pro vides a precise shift schedule The transmis Sion electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Gear Ranges NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a mo ment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially im portant when the engine is cold If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to cycle
293. o the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute Off When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone Press the button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the Uconnect Phone Press the button Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the 4 VR button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect Phone and Mobile Phone Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone the Uconnect Phone follow the
294. o the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground ex posed metal part of the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery and the fue injection system WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few min utes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the
295. of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fas cia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning per formance Blower Control 045607536 For full automatic op eration or for automatic blower operation turn the knob to AUTO posi tion In manual mode there are seven blower speeds that can be in dividual selected In off position the blower will shut off Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Pre ferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob on the left NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for de tails 169 Automatic Temperature Control Operation The system will Air Temperature Air Recirculation Operation How Blower Control Mode Control Control Control A C Operation Full Automatic Operation Set blower knob to Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Auto Set mode knob be overridden to Auto Set temperature for 10 minutes knobs for comfort at a timc Blower Preferred Automati
296. of the strap You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or con nectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then locate the tether anchor age directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions 45 WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the ISOFIX anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufactur er s directions exactly when installing an in fant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating posi tions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor to secure a Child Restraint System CRS These types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if
297. off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Replace the ignition cables Replace the spark plugs Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 60 months Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 286 112 500 Miles 180 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Q Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tt 1 Rotate tires Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 120 000 Miles 192 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule LJ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tF J Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter 1 Replace accessory drive belt s Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes 21 Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing 1 Change the manual
298. old the LOCK button on a pro grammed RKE transmitter 2 Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE trans mitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm acti vated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Ve hicle Security Alarm 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors The turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp once to ac knowledge the lock signal To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock NOTE The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be turned on or off using the following steps 1 Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the UNLOCK button is pressed after four seconds press the RKE transmitter LOCK button Release both buttons 3 Test the Flash Lights With Lock feature outside of the vehicle by pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK button with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed N
299. ollowed mmm o 253 Materials Added to Engine Oils Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemen tal additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All of the manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replace ment filters varies considerably Only high qual ity filters should be used to assure most effi 254 cient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air cleaner can provide protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless it is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engin
300. ometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as pos sible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indica tor Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation The ESC OFF Indicator Light in e dicates the Electronic Stability Control ESC is off OFF Trailer Sway Control TSC TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the 215 appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of
301. one button and Voice Command button that will 58 enable you to access the system When you press the button you will hear the word Uconnect followed by a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE The driver side upper windshield trim con tains the microphone for the Uconnect Phone Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with radio The individual buttons t VR are described in the Operation section The Uconnect Phone can be used with Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phones Some phones may not support all the Uconnect Phone features Refer to your mo bile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice com mands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready promp
302. oning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunc tion use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure 252 Engine Oil Gasoline Engine Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within he SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of he SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 7 500 miles 12 000 km or six months whichever comes first Engine Oil Selection Non ACEA Categories For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the require ments of Chrysle
303. ons 29 Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped TTC 30 e Seat Belt Pretensioners 30 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert 30 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 31 Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags 31 Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls 34 Event Data Recorder a EEE 38 e Child Restraints 38 ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS 47 e Additional Requirements For Diesel Engine If Equipped 22222222220 UN S 48 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in plastic bag with the key code number on it If you received your keys without the bag ask your authorized dealer to give you the number The key code can also be obtained by your authorized dealer from your vehicle invoice Ignition Key Removal 1 Place the shift lever in PARK if equipped with an automatic transmission 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC ACCES SORY position Ignition Switch Positions 1 LOCK 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN 4 START 3 Push the ignition key inward 4 Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key WARNING Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake ped
304. ont Axle Lock Indicator If Equipped Indicates when the front axle lock FRONT has been activated 7 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned A to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continu ously Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for fur ther information 8 Turn Signal Indicators The left or right arrow will flash with the corresponding exterior turn signal lights when the turn signal lever is operated A chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on 9 Oil Pressure Warning Light tp This light shows low engine oil pres sure The light should turn on momen tarily when the engine is started if the bulb does not come on have the system checked by an authorized dealer If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 10 High Beam Indicator Light z This light shows that the high
305. ontrol System TCS Indicator Light begins to during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible This indi cator light starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the Electronic Stability Pro gram ESP becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions If the ESP TCS Indi cator Light is on solid the ESP system has been turned off by the driver or a temporary condition exists that will not allow full ESP function 28 O D Overdrive Off Indicator Light This light will illuminate when the O D OFF OFF button has been selected and over drive has been turned off The O D OFF button is located on the center console 29 Sway Bar Indicator Light If Equipped This light will illuminate when the SWAY front sway bar is disconnected BAR 30 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Fl Stability Control ESC is off ee OFF 31 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is de tected while the engine is running the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the shift lever is p
306. oose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disas semble or modify the system Seat belt as semblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc Rear Center Lap Shoulder Belt Retractor Lockout Four Door Models Only This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever the 60 rear seatback is not fully latched This prevents someone from wearing the rear center lap shoulder belt when the rear seatback is not fully latched NOTE e f the rear center lap shoulder belt cannot be pulled out check that the rear seat back is fully latched 28 e f the rear seatback is properly latched and the rear center lap shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR system may be activated To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor WARNING The rear center lap shoulder belt is equipped with a lock out feature to ensure that the rear seatback is in the fully upright and locked position when occupied If the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked and the rear center lap shoulder belt can be pulled out of the retractor the vehicle should immediately be taken to your authorized dealer for service Failure to follow this warning could result in se
307. or eft will flash three times then automatically turn off Lights On Reminder f the headlights or parking lights are on after he ignition is turned OFF the high beam indi cator light will remain illuminated and a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Headlight Dimmer Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the ever toward you to switch the headlights back low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your head ights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever oward the steering wheel This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is re eased Front Fog Lights If Equipped The front fog light switch is in the multifunction lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the position lights or headlights and pull out the end of the lever 031407687 Fog Light Operation Rear Fog Lights If Equipped To activate the rear fog lights turn on QE the front position lights or headlights pull out the end of the multifunction lever and rotate the lever to the last detent Instrument Panel Dimmer Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instru ment panel lights and prevent the interior lights rom illuminating when a door is opened Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel ights when the parking lights
308. ou may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between and 24 In very cold weather Co 174 if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 3 045606725 STARTING AND OPERATING lt STARTINGIPROGEDURES T T E T 180 Manual Transmission Equipped 180 Automatic Transmission If Equipped 180 Normal Starting Gasoline Engine 180 Extreme Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C 180 if Engine FailsiTo Start c yaa ne ese 181 After Starting 222252222504 Wee ee ee 181 Normal Starting Diesel Engine 182 STOP START SYSTEM DIESEL MODELS WITH MANUAL TRANSMISSION ON 183 e Automatic 183 e MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED 185 Shifting 222220222122 2812 186 Downshifting 187 Reverse SOI a a 187 175 176 e AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED Key Ignition Park Interlock Brake Transmission Interlock System Four Speed Automatic Transmission With Overdrive 3 81 Engine Five Speed Automatic Transmission 2 81 Diesel Engine Gear Ranges e FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION COMMAND TRAC 1 OR ROCK TRACE 520227222022 Operating Instructions Precautions
309. ouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoul der belt under an arm or behind the back Automatic Locking Retractor ALR To operate the switchable retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull on the belt until it is all removed from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap por tion around the child restraint Follow the in structions of the child restraint manufacture NOTE To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor Installing the Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means for adjusting the tension of the strap Forward facing toddler restraints some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap having a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage an
310. ould skid CAUTION When descending a hill be very careful to downshift one gear at a time to prevent over Speeding the engine which can cause valve damage and or clutch disc damage even if the clutch pedal is pressed Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds CAUTION Failure to follow the recommended downshift ing speeds may cause the engine to over Speed and or damage the clutch disc even if the clutch pedal is pressed in MPH KM H Gear Se 3to 2to lee 6105 5104 403 1 tion Maxi 80 70 50 30 15 mum 129 113 81 48 24 Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds Speed Reverse Shifting To shift into REVERSE bring the vehicle to complete stop Press the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to stop rotating Beginning from the NEUTRAL position move the shift lever in one quick smooth motion straight across and into the REVERSE area the driver will feel a firm click as the shifter passes the knock over Complete the shift by pulling the shift lever into REVERSE The knock over prevents the driver from ac cidentally entering the REVERSE shift area and warns the driver that they are about to shift the transmission into REVERSE Due to this feature a slow shift to REVERSE can be perceived as a high shift effort AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the
311. ovide power for accessories designed for use with the standard power outlet adapters The front power outlet located in the lower portion of the instrument panel has a snap on plastic cap so that it can be covered when not in use When the optional cigar lighter heating element is used in the power outlet it heats when pushed in and pops out automatically when ready for use To preserve the heating ele ment do not hold the lighter in the heating position 91 Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be re placed Front Power Outlet The front power outlet is powered from the ignition switch Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position Items plugged into this power outlet may dis charge the battery and or prevent the engine from starting 92 On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer there is a power outlet located in the right rear cargo area Rear Power Outlet If Equipped WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued f this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure
312. ovides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only an swer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on call press the button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls
313. ow the prompts e You can also press the 4 VR button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete 68 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the Uconnect Phone features press the button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the Uconnect Phone recognizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter his training mode follow one of the two follow ing procedures From outside the Uconnect M Phone mode e g from radio mode Press and hold the button for five seconds until the session begins or Press the button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched OFF This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Command system to fac tory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Command e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least Y in 1 cm gap between the overhea
314. ow Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side window fogging be comes a problem increase blower speed Ve hicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the ple num they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recircu lated air within the passenger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Main taining Your Vehicle for A C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Ref
315. ownload The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to ac cept phonebook entries from your phone using he Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owners anual for specific instructions on how to send hese entries from your phone NOTE Phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may See a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the Uconnect Phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owners Manual for specific in structions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries Editing names in the phonebook is recom mended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e Press the button to begin 61 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or other that you wish
316. partment 94 e DUAL TOP IF EQUIPPED 94 e Removingithe 58011 94 e Installing the Soft Top 95 FREEDOM THREE PIECE MODULAR HARD TOP IF EQUIPPED eon a RUN IN TR RUE 97 eiEron Panel siIRemoval TT 97 Freedom Top Storage Bag 98 Front Panel s Installation 100 Front Panel s Installation with Rear Hard Top Removed 100 e Rear Top Removal 100 Rear Hard Top Installation 102 DOOR FRAME 2 254 4 2 102 Door krame Removal oa a e 102 Door Frame Installation Two Door Models 103 Door Frame Installation Four Door Models 104 e SOFT TWO DOOR MODELS Quick Steps to Lowering the Soft Top Quick Steps to Raising the Soft Top Soft 011 22222000 7720 en e SOFT FOUR DOOR MODELS Quick Steps for Lowering the Soft Top Quick Steps for Raising the Soft Top e Folding Down The Soft Top e Putting Up The Soft TO sa sarm amem anmnnan e SUNRIDER TWO DOOR MODELS IF EQUIPPED Opening the Sunrider e Closing theSunrider SUNRIDER F
317. pecific type of lower attachment never install ISOFIX compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing ISOFIX compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the ISOFIX anchors or the vehi cle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not ISOFIX compatible you can only install the child re straints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Installing The ISOFIX Compatible Child Restraint System for typical installation instructions ISOFIX Child Seat Two Door Models Size Fixture Seating Position Class Front Rear Mp Pas Out senger board 0 Upto E ISO R1 X X 10 kg 1 X X E ISO R1 X X 04 Up D ISO R2 X X to 13 kg C ISO R3 X X 1 X X D ISO R2 X X C ISO R3 X X B ISO F2 X IUF 1 9 to 18kg B1 ISO X IUF F2X A 1 5 X IUF 1 X X Il 15 to 1 X X 25 kg Ill 22 to 1 X X 36 kg 1 For the child restraint systems CRS which do not carry the ISO XX size class iden tification A to G for the applicable mass group the manufacturer will indicate the ve hicle specific ISOFIX child restraint system s recommended for each position Key of letters used in the table above IUF Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal
318. place if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 282 52 500 Miles 84 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule filter tt Rotate tires Q Change the engine oil and engine oil Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 60 000 Miles 96 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule O O C O Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tF Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 Change the automatic transmission fluid and main sump filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code
319. positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charg ing system inspected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will dis charge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting 243 TOW EYES Your vehicle is equipped with tow eyes which are mounted in the front and the rear CAUTION Tow eyes are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow eyes for tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle Tow straps are recommended when towing the vehicle chains may cause vehicle damage WARNING Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow eyes Tow straps and chains may break caus ing serious injury 244 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 Firmly set the parking brake 2 Turn the ignition to the ON RUN position without starting the engine 3 Using a screwdriver or similar tool carefully remove the shift lever override access cover is located on the PRNDL bez
320. r 4H to 4L or 4L to 4H With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL N or press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired posi tion Do not pause with the transfer case in N Neutral Once the shift is completed place the automatic transmission into DRIVE or re lease the clutch pedal on a manual transmis sion 195 Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped however diffi culty may occur due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h WARNING Failure to engage a position completely can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle control You could have a colli Sion Do not drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged TRAC LOK REAR AXLE IF EQUIPPED The Trac Lok rear axle provides a constant driving force to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the loss of traction at one driving wheel If traction differs between the two 196 rear wheels the differential automatically pro
321. r Panel Removal in this section 3 Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket screws two per side using a 30 Torx head driver ER 4 Disconnect the knuckles from the left and right metal pivot brackets Remove the soft top from the vehicle and store in a clean dry location To aid in disconnecting the knuckles you may carefully tap on the knuckles using a rubber mallet 5 Unzip the zipper on the sport bar cover to expose the pivot brackets Remove the brack ets using a 30 Torx head driver Recover and re zip the sports bar cover Store the pivot brackets and screws in a safe place 035605928 6 Reinstall the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Installation in this section Installing the Soft Top NOTE The following procedures are for first time set up only For future soft top procedures refer to Soft Top in this section 1 Locate and remove the following items prior to hard top removal Right and left door frames Door frame attachment knobs four for two door models six for four door models Right and left quarter windows Rear window 2 Remove the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Removal in this section 3 Install the door frames Refer to Door Frame in this section 95 4 If the soft top has been removed follow these steps to reinst
322. r Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute The manu facturer only rec ommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Selection ACEA Categories For countries that use the ACEA European Oi Categories for Service Fill Oils use engine oils hat meet the requirements of ACEA C3 and hat are approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 Engine Oil Viscosity 3 8L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil im proves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom mended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information NOTE SAE 5W 30 engine oil approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil is not available Engine Oil Diesel Engine Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop For vehicles equipped with a Diesel Part
323. r assembly counter clockwise until they can be removed 97 3 Turn the center L shaped locks two from the center of the roof panel 035707351 4 Turn the rear L shaped lock located above the shoulder belt anchorage 81 4523 98 5 Unlatch the header panel latch located at the top of the windshield 6 Remove the left hand panel To remove the right panel follow the steps above except for Step 3 Freedom Top Storage Bag Your vehicle comes with a Freedom Top storage bag that allows you to store your Free dom Top panels The storage bag contains two compartments and fits behind the rear seat Lay the Freedom bag down so the loops and hooks are facing downward Unzip the bag and fold back the outer flap Release the Velcro on the black panel divider and fold it back NOTE Ensure the front Freedom Top panel latch is closed prior to inserting the panel into the Freedom bag Insert the right side Freedom panel into the bag with the latches facing downward Hi a 035707990 Unfold the black panel divider ensure the divider is laying flat Secure the Velcro located at the center of the divider Insert the left side Freedom panel into the bag with the latches facing upward NOTE Ensure the front Freedom panel latch is closed prior to inserting the panel into the bag D a 035707992 035707994 Unfold the outer flap and z
324. r equivalent then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary 265 Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use OPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning pur poses Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respi ratory harm CAUTION When installing hanging air fresheners in your vehicle read the installation instructions care fully Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use cau tion when cleaning inside rear windows 266 equipped with electric defrosters Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe c
325. r out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than the idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Use only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL This range is used when vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running Engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing coasting or driving the vehicle for any other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating and Towing a Dis abled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergen cies for further information OVERDRIVE This range is used for most city and highway driving transmission contains electronically controlled fourth gear Overdrive and will automatically shift from DRIVE to OVERDRIVE if the following conditions are present e The shift lever is in DRIVE e The O D OFF switch has not been activated e Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h When frequent transmission shifting occurs while using Overdrive such as when operating the vehicle
326. r s Manual contains a complete listing of all sub jects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual X O is pu im 9 i 2 i f E E Ic pip ja lolo i i i 3 i yi os f E E 3 5 i E i E E i E i 3 i i 4WD BRAKE amp i ES 19 ss 3 lx riot d9 i 2 ud REARFOGLAMP DEFROSTAND VENTILATING FAN WINDOW LOCK eom WARNING PARKING OPEN AR BRAKE e amp d m 0 BELT SUDING DOOR TRUNK DECK AIR CONDITIONING CHILD SEAT WARNING TOW HAL CHARGING RELEASE TETHER ANCHOR 4 w amp LOWER ANCHORS PLUG POWER SOE ARBAG AIRBAG SUDING DOOR EMERGENCY AND TETHER FOR UCONNECT HAZARD FOUR WHEEL STEERING FLUID RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH IUTTON DRIVE LOW ns X C B ameac 2 bo PONI 2 INDICATOR Lent OM TEMP 90 Tou AMALSO COMOIMONER CONTROL OFF 010533317 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could re sult in damage to your vehicle If you do not r
327. r the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with an elec tronic disconnecting stabilizer sway bar This system allows greater front suspension travel in off road situations This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column Sway Bar Switch Press the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system Press the switch again to deactivate the system The Sway Bar Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the bar is disconnected The Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash during activation tran sition or when activation conditions are not met The stabilizer sway bar should remain in on road mode during normal driving condi tions WARNING Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on hard surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph 29 km h you may lose control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury The front stabilizer bar enhances vehicle sta bility and is necessary for maintaining control of the vehicle The system monitors vehicle speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabi lizer bar at speeds over 18 mph 29 km h This is indicated by a flashing or solid Sway Bar Indicator Light Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph 22 km h the system will once again attempt to return to off road mode To disco
328. rake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 12 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light After the ignition is turned on the Anti Lock Brake System ABS light illumi nates to indicate function check at vehicle start up If the light remains on after start up or comes on and stays at road speeds it may indicate that the ABS has de tected a malfunction or has become inopera tive The system reverts to standard non anti lock brakes If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on see an authorized dealer immediately Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting And Operating 148 13 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays turns on while driving then have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 14 Rear Axle Lock Indicator If Equipped This light indicates when the rear REAR axle lock has been activated 15 Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in Revolutions Per Minute RPM NOTE If equipped with a diesel engine and a manual transmission the vehicle will be equipped with a Start Stop mode When the engine is off while in Stop Start mode ta chometer needle will be in g
329. re on rotating the dimmer control to the extreme bottom position will cause all the interior lights to turn off This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharg ing the vehicle s battery Headlight Leveling System If Equipped This system allows the driver to maintain proper headlight beam position with the road surface regardless of vehicle load The headlight level ing switch is located on the lower switch bank below the climate controls To operate With the low beams on 0 1 A push the upper side or lower side 22 of the headlight leveling switch un Y til the appropriate number which corresponds to the load listed on the following chart illuminates on the switch NOTE Headlight Leveling will not activate when the parking lights or high beam headlights are on 0 Driver only or driver and front pas senger 1 All seating positions occupied 2 All seating positions occupied plus an evenly distributed load in the luggage compartment The total weight of passengers and load does not exceed the maximum load capacity of the vehicle 3 Driver plus an evenly distributed load in the luggage compartment The total weight of the driver and load does not exceed the maximum load capacity of the vehicle Calculations based on a passenger weight of 165 lbs 75 kg WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHE
330. read the Owner s Manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold The manufacturer reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or to make additions to or improvements in its products without imposing any obligations upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured The Owner s Manual illustrates and describes the features that are standard or available as extra cost options Therefore some of the equipment and accessories in this publication may not appear on your vehicle NOTE Be sure to read the Owner s Manual first before driving your vehicle and before at taching or installing parts accessories or making other modifications to the vehicle In view of the many replacement parts and accessories from various manufacturers avail able on the market the manufacturer cannot be certain that the driving safety of your vehicle will not be impaired by the attachment or instal lation of such parts Even if such parts are officially approved for example by a general operating permit for the part or by constructing the part in an officially approved design or if an individual operating permit was issued for the vehicle after the attachment or installation of such parts it cannot be implicitly assumed that the driving safety of your vehicle is unim paired Therefore neither experts nor official agencies are liable Therefore the manu
331. reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized deal ership for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealership for service if your ve hicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Ve hicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 20 Cruise Indicator Light This light shows when the elec CRUISE tronic speed control system is turned on 21 4WD Indicator Light If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four wheel drive 4WD mode and the front and rear drive shafts are mechanically locked to gether forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed 22 Odometer Trip Odometer ECO Fuel Saver Indicator Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings or the ECO display Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Press and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers The odometer must be in trip mode to reset 23 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift
332. recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Front Rear Axle Fluid Fluid Level Check Lubricant should be at the bottom edge of the oil fill hole 264 Adding Fluid Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly cor rosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to air borne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or re moval of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation
333. reen banded zone of tachometer and the EVIC message Stop Start Auto Stop Active will display for five seconds For further information on the Start Stop system refer to Start Stop Sys tem in Starting And Operating CAUTION Do not operate the engine with the tachom eter pointer in the red area Engine damage will occur 16 Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated en E gine condition If the engine is critically T hot a warning chime will sound 10 times After the chime turns off the engine will still be critically hot until the light goes out 17 Rear Fog Light Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog lights are on 18 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when o the vehicle security alarm is arm ing and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 19 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant emperature Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher emperature when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper imits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge
334. remove the doors store them outside the vehicle In the event of an accident loose door may cause personal injury Lowering the Windshield and Removing Side Bars 1 Lower the fabric top or remove the hard top following the instructions in this manual NOTE To assist in properly reinstalling side bars mark the original locations prior to remov ing 2 Remove the two top hex bolts 13 mm and the one side hex bolt 13 mm visible through the trim Do not remove plastic corner trim sun visor bolts or sport bar covering 819292b7 3 Remove the sun visor 4 Remove the A pillar cap 5 Disconnect microphone if equipped with uconnect phone 6 Open the sport bar Velcro covering 7 Remove the one hex bolt 13 mm visible through the plastic trim on the bottom side of the side bar one hex bolt 13 mm on the side of the side bar and one hex bolt 18 mm on top of the side bar 137 Pull side bar out horizontally when remov ing CAUTION Do not remove the head impact foam from the side bars as damage to the foam may result NOTE Store all of the mounting bolts in their origi nal threaded holes and tighten for safekeep ing 8 Remove the side bar assembly and reat tach the sport bar Velcro9 covering 138 9 To safely store the side bars in your vehicle use four cinch straps available from your au horized dealer Attach the straps through the Slots loca
335. ric upper doors and fabric top are designed only for protection against the elements Do not rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident Remem ber always wear seat belts CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew on the top material e t is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior 106 Continued CAUTION Continued to leak into the vehicle s interior rior Careless handling and storage of the soft top may damage the seals causing water The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle s inte Quick Steps to Lowering the Soft Top or further information 1 Remove the side and back windows Refer to Lowering the Soft Top in this section 2 Release header latches from the windshield frame 3 Release the Sunrider latch both sides 81 65428 4 Open the swing gate and lower the top NOTE Ensure fabric does not overhang the sides of the vehicle fence 2 Mane Quick Steps to Raising the Soft Top Refer to Raising the Soft Top in this section for further information 1 Open the swing gate and r
336. rious or fatal injury Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins imme diately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seat positions the shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or down ward to position the belt away from your neck Push in on the anchorage near your outside shoulder and slide it up or down to reach the position that serves you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt WARNING Position the shoulder belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in an accident As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller han average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position NOTE The adj
337. ront Airbag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air bags 2 Knee Bolster NOTE These airbags are certified to new regula tions for Advanced Airbags The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the severity and type of collision 31 This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passen ger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad vanced Front Airbags This vehicle may be equipped with Supple mental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags are located in the out board side of the front seats NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immedi ately Airbag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the follow ing airbag system components Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Airbag Warning Light 32 e Steering Wheel and Column e Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolster e Driver Advanced Front Airbag e Passenger Advanced Front Airbag e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB e
338. ry operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for the proper inspection proce dure When replacing tires refer to Tires Gen eral Information in Starting and Operating for proper tire replacement procedures Re placing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits 231 Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake sys tem or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inad equate braking and possible personal injury When towing a trailer equipped with a hy draulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 450 kg and required for trailers in excess of 1 653 1 5 750 kg CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 450 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances 232 WARNING e Do not connect tra
339. s are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering This makes for a faster cleaner and easier vehicle recovery If you are able to determine you can safely cross than proceed using the low and slow method CAUTION Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effectiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator Crossing Ditches Streams Shallow Rivers Or Other Flowing Water Flowing water can be extremely dangerous Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow water Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control Even in very shallow water a high current can still wash the dirt out from around your tires putting you and your vehicle in There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths greater than the vehi cle s running ground clearance You should never attempt to cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle s running ground clear ance Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle downstream and out of control ifthe water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of the vehicle s body Before you proceed determine the speed of the current the water s depth approach angle bottom condition and if there are any obstacles Then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream using the low and slow technique WARNING Never drive through fast movin
340. s calibra tion the engine must be running and the transmission in the PARK position if equipped If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate and the variance has been properly set you may wish to manually recalibrate the compass To manually calibrate the compass 1 First enter the variance mode Press and hold the left button located on the instrument cluster 156 for approximately 10 seconds to enter the vari ance mode and release the button when the VAR Compass Variance symbol appears 2 The current variance value will also be dis played Once in the variance mode it is nec essary to release the button and then press and hold it again approximately 10 seconds until CAL is displayed solid not blinking 3 Manual compass calibration has been initi ated Drive the vehicle slowly in one or more circles under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from large metal objects until the CAL indicator turns off When the CAL symbol is no longer displayed the compass is calibrated and should display correct headings Verify proper calibration by checking North N South S East E and West W If the compass does not appear accurate repeat the calibration procedure in another area Compass Variance VAR Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To en sure compass accuracy the compass variance should be properly set according to the vari ance map for the zone where the ve
341. seat belts and pretensioners Ad vanced Front Airbags work with the knee bol sters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant pro tection Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position 33 Children that are not big enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt should be secured in the rear seat in a child restraint or belt positioning booster seat Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should always use their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate force
342. sed up to 5 Years or 105 000 miles 168 000 km before replace ment To prevent reducing this extended main enance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout he life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using OPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are antici pated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant an tifreeze and will require more frequent en gine coolant antifreeze changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and t
343. setting Oil Change Indicator 160 Restraint Head iR 79 Restraints Child 38 41 Restraints Occupant 24 Rotation Tires zu ner ee 6 220 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 49 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 50 Safety Exhaust 48 Safety 48 Schedule Maintenance 278 290 Seat Belt Reminder 30 Seat koe 25 49 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 28 And Pregnant Women 31 Child 38 46 Front Seat 25 INSPECHON uua xem Reg 49 Maintenance 266 Pretensioners 30 Reminder ue occ d 146 Untwisting Procedure 28 SOAS oss dd odiis de 76 Adjustment ls 77 Easy Reed 78 Fold and Tumble Rear 80 Head Restraints 79 Height Adjustment 77 Rear Folding 82 REMOVAL sax sx 81 Seatback Release 78 e cua aioe os IRURE eB as 78 Security Against Theft 15 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 15 Sentry Key Immobilizer 14 Sentry Key Programming 15 Service Assistance 302 Settings Personal 162 Shift Lever Override 244 50252 sv Boke 187 Au
344. small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix UY e Air is directed through the floor defrost x and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the wind shield Defrost Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when nec essary Recirculation Control Pressing the Recirculation Control button will put the system in recir Cem culation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humid ity are present Activating recircu lation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate After ten minutes the system will return to normal mode function and the LED will turn off NOTE Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and win dow fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside
345. ss the button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it Press the Su button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations Prompts On Setup Confirmations Prompts Off Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dial ing a number with your paired Bluetooth mo bile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring t
346. ssengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Continued 240 WARNING Continued Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change e f working on or near a roadway be tremely careful of motor traffic e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground B TAB Jack Warning Label CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 1 Remove the spare tire jack and tools from he stored location 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while he wheel is
347. ssible This will keep any portion of the top from flapping outside of the vehicle 21 Once the top is fully down use the Velcro straps provided to secure the top to the vehicle by wrapping the strap around the side bows and through the slot on the body 22 Close the front header latches 23 Remove the door frames if desired Refer to Door Frame in this section for further infor mation Putting Up The Soft Top NOTE Be extremely careful when putting up the soft top to prevent the doors from getting scratched It may be helpful to open the rear doors 1 Install the door frames if removed Refer to Door Frame in this section for further informa tion 2 Undo the straps used to secure the top in the down position and store in secure location 3 Open the swing gate 4 Grasp the folded side bows and lift to the top of the rear door frames NOTE Help from another person will ease this operation 129 5 Insert the slider feature of the knuckles into the door frame tracks and slide the top forward 81926dc3 6 Ensure that the top locks into the Sunrider locking mechanisms that are located above the front of the rear doors 130 SN 7 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 8 Standing on the side of the vehicle lift the top by the side bow until it rests on the wind shield frame 036107424 9 Open the header latches and engage the hook on each side onto the
348. ssion into NEU TRAL or depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission 5 Shift the transfer case lever into N Neutral 6 Start the engine 7 Shift the transmission into REVERSE 8 Release the brake pedal and clutch pedal on manual transmissions for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 with automatic trans mission in DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear 10 Turn OFF the engine and leave the ignition switch in the unlocked OFF position 11 Firmly apply the parking brake 12 Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual transmission in gear NOT in Neutral 235 CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in N Neutral and the engine running With the transfer case in N Neutral ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into PARK 13 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar 14 Release the parking brake 15 Disconnect the negative battery cable and secure it away from the negative battery post Shifting Out of Neutral N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop leaving it connected to the tow vehicle 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Reconnect the negative battery cable 236 4 Turn the ignition key fob to the LOCK OFF position if it has be
349. still on the ground 3 Assemble the jack and jacking tools Con nect the jack handle driver to the extension hen to the lug wrench 4 Operate the jack from the front or the rear of he vehicle Place the jack under the axle tube as shown Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged 060505249 Jacking Locations 1 Rear Jacking Lo 2 Front Jacking Lo cation cation 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable and cause a collision It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 7 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw o the left and remove the jack 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on he wrench while tightening for increased lever age Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice
350. sult WARNING Driving with the flip up window open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flip up window closed when you are operating the vehicle OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passenger Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB if equipped An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters blockers for front seat pants Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event e All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the ISOFIX feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more informa tion refer to ISOFIX Child Seat Anchorage System NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multi stage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different r
351. t Switch Four Door Models The window lockout switch located between the front window switches allows you to dis able the rear window switches that are located on the back of the center floor console To disable the window controls press the window lockout button downward To enable the win dow controls press the window lockout button upward Window Lockout Switch 23 Rear Power Windows Four Door Models The rear passenger window switches are lo cated on the back of the center floor console Press the switch downward to open the window and upward to close the window Rear Power Window Switches Four Door Models Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the per ception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down in cer tain open or partially open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized by adjusting window opening 24 REAR SWING GATE The swing gate can be unlocked by using the key Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors To open the swing gate press the button on the gate handle Gate Handle NOTE Close the rear flip up window before at tempting to close the swing gate hard top models only CAUTION Do not press on rear wiper blade when closing the rear flip up window as damage to the blade will re
352. t mechanic 290 Maintenance Schedule Diesel Engine Diesel Models with Diesel Particulate Filter DPF The oil change indicator system will remind you hat it is time to take your vehicle in for sched uled maintenance A CHANgE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as pos sible within the next 500 miles 805 km Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this scheduled oil change is per formed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Instrument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odometer in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Diesel Models without Diesel Particulate Filter DPF Tt Change the engine oil and engine oil filter at every 6 250 miles 10 000 km or six months if using your vehicle under any of the following severe duty conditions e Stop go driving e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service commercial service Off road or desert operation At Each Stop for Fuel Ch
353. t or another prompt e For certain operations compound com mands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the compound form of the voice com mand is given You can also break the com mands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound form voice command Phonebook New Entry or you can break the compound form com mand into two voice commands Phone book and New Entry Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the su button and follow the audible prompts for directions All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu P
354. t type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor 217 Inflation pressures specified on the placard always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire side wall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be in creased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition 218 Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa
355. te brackets pull the is not equipped with the Sunrider package front of the bracket forward while rolling the proceed to Step 15 entire bracket back in toward the vehicle to disengage 81925 7 113 16 Unlatch the side bows from both door rails Sunrider Models only 81 65428 17 Before lowering the top open the swing gate to prevent possible damage to the rear center high mounted brake light Move to the front of the vehicle Grasp the side bow behind the header and lift the top folding it toward the rear of the vehicle NOTE Help from another person will ease this operation 114 d 18 Tuck the fabric and the check straps be tween the bows and as far inward as possible This will keep any portion of the top from flapping outside of the vehicle 19 Close the front header latches 20 Remove the door frames if desired Refer o Door Frame in this section for further infor mation Raising the Soft Top 1 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 2 Install door frames if removed Refer to Door Frame in this section for further informa tion 3 Make sure the plastic sleeve is slid over Sunrider link Sunrider Models only 4 Standing on the side of the vehicle lift the top by the side bow and the 2 bow middle bow up and over the sports bar until the header rests on the top of the windshield frame 7 If the swing gate brackets were r
356. ted on the floor behind the folded rear seat at the front of the storage bin cover WARNING You or others could be injured if you carry the side bars loose in your vehicle Remove the Side bars from the vehicle or securely store them as described or they may cause per sonal injury if an accident occurs See your authorized dealer for the cinch straps 10 Remove the windshield wiper arms by first pulling the wiper away from the windshield and out to the lock position Unsnap the wiper arm nut caps and remove the retaining nuts Lift the wiper arms off and store them in the center console or securely behind the rear seat NOTE It may be necessary to use a battery terminal puller tool in order to separate the wiper arms from the shaft after the nuts have been removed 11 Remove the lower windshield plates by removing the six black round headed Torx head screws using a 40 Torx head driver on each side of the base of the windshield 12 Lower the windshield gently until it con tacts the rubber hood bumpers 13 Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap through the footman hoop on the center of the hood and on the center of the windshield frame Tighten the strap to secure the wind shield in place Raising the Windshield and Replacing Side Bars 1 Raise the windshield 2 Loosely attach the rear of the side bar to the sport bar Refer to Step 4 of Lowering Wind shield And Removing Sid
357. tem determines that the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse is improp erly installed or damaged a noFUSE mes sage will display in the odometer display area For further information on fuses and fuse loca tions refer to Fuses in Maintaining Your Ve hicle CHAngE OIL Message Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHANgE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odom eter button on the instrument cluster To reset 152 the oil change indicator system after perform ing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal Slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indica tor system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 26 Malfunction Ind
358. ter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can press the button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated cus tomer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect Phone book entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The Uconnect Phone 66 will then send the corresponding phone num ber associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations this is normal Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could pre
359. test Drive belt tension should also be checked at his time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air con ditioning system as the chemicals can dam age your air conditioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri cants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system Some unap proved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the System to fail requiring costly repairs The air conditioning system contains refrig erant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C Sys tem Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Con ditioners Compressor Oil and Refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro fluorocarbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency EPA and is an ozone saving product However the manu facturer recommends that air conditioning ser vice be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recy cling equipment Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points
360. the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE When using the ISOFIX attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before in stalling the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buck led seat belt interferes with the child re straint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave an unattended child in the vehicle The rear seating positions have lower anchor ages that are capable of accommodating ISOFIX compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only Regard less of the s
361. the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks e Maintain the engine coolant antifreeze con centration at 50 HOAT engine coolant an tifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or ob structed e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever nec essary install ONLY the correct type thermo stat Other designs may result in unsatisfac tory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be in spected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance inter vals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Power Disc Brakes Disc brakes do not require adjustment how ever several hard stops during the break in period are recommended to seat the linings and wear off any fore
362. the appropriate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an exces Sively swaying trailer is recognized No driver action is required Note that TSC cannot stop all railers from swaying Always use caution when owing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Towing in Starting and Operating for further information When TSC is functioning the ESC Activation alfunction Indicator Light will flash the en gine power may be reduced and you may feel he brakes being applied to individual wheels attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in the Partial Off or Full Off modes WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway 216 Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped HDC is only intended for low speed off road driving HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills in off road driving conditions by applying the brakes when necessary The symbol indicates the status of af the Hill Descent Control HDC fea gt The lamp will be on solid when HDC is armed HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in the 4WD LOW position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph 48 km h If these conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC feature the HDC ind
363. ther Vehicle 234 e Recreational Towing Four Wheel Drive Models 234 179 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Never leave children in the vehicle alone Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons The child or others could be seriously or fatally injured The child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Apply the parking brake place the shift lever in EUTRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting the vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to he floor 180 Manual Transmission If Equipped 4WD Models Only In 4L mode this vehicle will start regardless of whether or not the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor This feature enhances off road perfor mance by allowing the vehicle to start when in 4L without having to press the clutch pedal The 4WD Indicator Light will illuminate when the transfer case has been shifted into this mode Automatic Transmission If Equipped Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or PARK position Apply the brake before shifting to any driving ran
364. tion and the brake pedal is not pressed To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to either the ON or START position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Four Speed Automatic Transmission With Overdrive 3 8L Engine Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE or from P or R to D should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the shift lever between these gears Shift Lever Gear Ranges NOTE Under extreme cold temperatures 10 F 23 C and when in DRIVE transmission operation may be briefly limited to only second gear operation Normal operation will resume once the transmission tempera ture has risen to a suitable level DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL position into another gear range This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first then place the shift lever in the PARK position WARNING Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the park ing brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage It is dangerous to move the shift leve
365. tomatic Transmission 188 191 Manual Transmission 185 Transfer Case Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 235 Transfer Case Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 236 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 28 Shoulder Belts 25 318 Side Airbag 36 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 173 Signals 50 84 146 SOM TOD us 105 119 Sound Systems Radio 164 Sound Systems Refer to the Sound Systems Booklet Spare Tire 239 Speed Control Cruise Control 90 Speedometer 146 Startig as ous ge ae 180 Automatic Transmission 180 Cold Weather 180 Engine Fails to Start 181 Manual Transmission 180 Steering POWER Oia 205 206 Tilt COMM uiu duh ees 89 rne RR 13 Wheel Tilt urn cce 89 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 164 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 164 151016215 gt a debo 93 271 Storage Behind the Seat 94 Storage Vehicle 172 271 Storing Your Vehicle 271 SUMMAST 552 io ud e we des 133 135 Supplemental Restraint System ADAG PP 31 Sway Bar Disconnect Electronic 197 Swing Gate Rear 24 Synthetic Engine 253
366. trimental effects of electronic inter ference caused by improperly installed after market radios or telephones NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard This is normal indicating that the Anti Lock Brake System is functioning ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Hill Start Assist HSA Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM Electronic Stability Control ESC Trailer Sway Control TSC and Hill Descent Control HDC All of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from act ing on the vehicle nor can they increase the traction afforded by prevailing road condi tions The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery sur faces or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be ex ploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is dete
367. tted by the trailer manu like this use a single loop only facturer since the clip may not be sufficiently strong for use in this way For detachable ball tow bar you must follow the recommended manufacturer or supplier procedure 81806760 81866762 Fixed Ball Neck Loop Method Detachable Ball Neck Loop Method 818e675d Fixed Ball Clip Loop Method 229 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Model Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt See Note Two Door 4 409 lbs 2 000 kg 220 1 5 100 kg All Four Door 7 716 lbs 3 500 kg 308 Ibs 140 kg Maximum trailer towing speed is limited to 62 mph 100 km h unless local laws require a lower speed NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be consid ered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never ex ceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Op erating for further information Trailer And Tongue Weight Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue
368. ull Off ESC mode is intended for off road use only 4L Range 4WD Models ESC This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4L range Whenever the vehicle is started in 4L range or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4H range or NEUTRAL to 4L range the ESC system will be in this mode In 4L range ESC and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph 64 km h At 40 mph 64 km h the normal ESC stability function returns but TCS remains off When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 56 km h the ESC system shuts off The ESC is off at low vehicle speeds in 4L range so that it will not interfere with off road 213 driving but the ESC function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph 64 km h The ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light will always be illuminated in 4L range when ESC is off NOTE The ESC OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed in the PARK position from any position other than PARK and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared WARNING With the ESC switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC and ERM are unavailable In an emergency evasive maneu ver the ESC and ERM systems will not en gage to assist in maintaining stability The
369. ults in an increase of 1 mph 2 km h To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a de crease of 1 mph 2 km h To Accelerate for Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system main tains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have a collision Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET There are two 12 Volt 13 Amp auxiliary power outlets that can pr
370. under heavy load conditions for example in hilly terrain strong head winds or trailer towing turning off overdrive will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup O D OFF Switch Overdrive can be locked out by pressing the O D OFF switch located on the center console A indicator light in the instrument cluster will 189 illuminate to show that the switch has been activated When the indicator light is on Over drive is locked out Pressing the switch a sec ond time restores the Overdrive function The lockout feature is useful when towing a trailer or carrying a heavy load If the transmission overheats a HOTOIL mes sage may be displayed in the odometer ac companied by a chime sound If the HOTOIL message turns on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the message turns off WARNING If the Transmission Temperature HOTOIL Warning Message is illuminated and you con tinue operating the vehicle in some circum stances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire 190 CAUTION Continuing to drive with the Transmission Temperature HOTOIL Warning Message il luminated will eventually cause severe trans mission damage or transmission failure 2 Second This range is used for moderate grades and to
371. use a locking clip For the seat belt with the automatic locking retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is fully extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint For additional information re fer to Automatic Locking Mode e n the rear seat you may have trouble tight ening the lap shoulder belt on the child re straint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out e f the belt still cannot be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens 40 the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint secure try a different seating position Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you WARNING When your child restraint is not in use secure itin the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accid
372. ust be fully released The engine will shut down the tachometer will fall to the Stop Start position the STOP START AUTO STOP ACTIVE message will ap pear and the heater air conditioning HVAC air flow will be reduced Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not AUTO STOP Prior to engine shut down the system will check many safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled In following situations the engine will not stop Driver s seat belt is not buckled Outside temperature is less than 1 F 17 C or greater than 104 F 40 C Actual cabin temperature is significantly dif ferent than temperature set on Auto HVAC e HVAC is set to full defrost mode e Engine has not reached normal operating temperature Battery discharged 184 e When driving in REVERSE e Hood is open e Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several times without the STOP START system going into a STOP START READY state under more extreme conditions of the items listed above To Start The Engine While In The STOP START AUTO STOP ACTIVE Mode When the shift lever is in NEUTRAL the engine will start when the clutch pedal is pressed The vehicle will go into STOP START SYSTEM NOT READY mode until the vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph 5 km h Conditions that will cause the engine to start automatically while in STOP START AUTO STOP ACTIVE mode The Engine Will Start Automatically
373. ustable upper shoulder belt anchor age is equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows the shoulder belt an chorage to be adjusted in the upward posi tion without pressing the release button To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating posi tions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information re fer to Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraint section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Center Passen ger First Row N A N A ALR Second ALR ALR ALR Row Third Row N A N A N A N A Not Applicable ALR Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupants mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupants mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click
374. vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high point when you let the vehicle down You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object 201 CAUTION Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard ob jects increases the risk of underbody damage Hill Climbing Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good understanding of your abilities and your vehicle s limitations Hills can cause serious problems Some are just too steep to climb and should not be attempted You should always feel confident with the vehicle and your abili ties You should always climb hills straight up and down Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle Before Climbing A Steep Hill As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness Determine if it is too steep Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail Is the trail straight up and down What is on top and the other side Are there ruts rocks branches or other obstacles on the path Can you safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong If everything looks good and you feel confident shift the transmission into a 202 lower gear with 4L Low engaged and pro ceed with caution maintaining your momentum as you climb the hill Driving Up Hill Once you have determined your ability to pro ceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear line your vehicle up for the straightest possible run Accelerate with an eas
375. ver a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or misposi tioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disas semble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower
376. wer bracket 3 Remove the seat from the vehicle Release Bar Location Replacing the Rear Seat Two Door Models Reverse the steps for removing the seat WARNING To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area with the rear seat folded down or removed from the vehicle The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts 81 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat Four Door Models To provide additional storage area each rear seat can be folded flat to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seat ing room NOTE Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to reposition the front seat to its mid track position Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily WARNING e ltis extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Continued 82 WARNING Continued Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly To Fold Down the Rear Seat Locate the pull strap lower outboard side of seat
377. where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm If the previously de scribed arming sequence has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are inside or outside the vehicle If you remain inside the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm 16 ILLUMINATED ENTRY The interior lights will come on when you open any door The lights will remain on after all of the doors are closed and then fade to off or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned on REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and swing gate from distances approxi mately 35 ft 11 m using a hand held Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE trans mitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 81865 27 Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock only the driver s door or twice to unlock all the doors and swing gate When the UNLOCK button is pressed the illuminated entry will turn on and the parking lights will flash on twice The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the following procedure 1 Press and h
378. with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low ire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold placard pressure Once the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure onitoring Telltale Light to be turned OFF The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extin guish once the updated tire pressures have been received The
379. y constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the hill Do not race forward into a steep grade the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control If the front end begins to bounce ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground As you approach the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth This will provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide enough traction to complete the climb If you do not make it to the top place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes WARNING Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around on a steep grade Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury Driving Downhill Before driving down a steep hill you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent What is the surface traction Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow controlled descent Are there obstacles Is it a straight descent Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast If you feel confident in your ability to proceed then make sure you are in 4L Low and pro
380. y pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched Manual Seat Adjustment WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dan gerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seatbelts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seatbelt Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped The driver s seat height can be raised or low ered by using the ratcheting handle located on the outboard side of the seat Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat push downward on the handle to lower the seat 930934787 Seat Height Adjustment 77 Front Seatback Recline Lean forward before lifting the handle then lean back to the desired position and release the handle Lift the handle to return the seat back to an upright position 030934788 2 Recline Lever WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death 78 Easy Entry Seats Two Door Models Pull upward on the recline lever toward the rear of the vehicle and slide the entire seat forward Easy Entry Seat To return the seat to a sitting posit
381. y times will be doubled Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will start and continue to operate for two or three wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the lever is pulled while in the off position the wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles and then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the wind shield could lead to a collision You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Feature Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate 031507504 Mist Control NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid TILT STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering col umn upward or downward The tilt lever is located on the steering column below the turn signal lever Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column With one hand firmly on the steering

1 - Jeep

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents